IQH3A 3U Enclosure V3 Gateway Upgrade IQ Modular Enclosure
Operator’s Manual © January 2006 www.snellwilcox.com Snell & Wilcox Ltd., Southleigh Park House, Eastleigh Road, Havant, Hants, PO9 2PE, United Kingdom. For technical assistance contact:
Tel: +44 (0)23 9248 9000
For general and sales assistance contact: Tel: +44 (0)20 8917 4300
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Fax: +44 (0)23 9245 1411
Fax: +44 (0)20 8607 9466
Version 1 Issue 1
0.1
IQH3A 3U Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 0
Table of Contents SECTION 1
Description
2
Specifications
3
Operation Control Panels ..................................................................................................... 3.1 The RollCall Communications System and Computer Control System ... 3.1 RollCall Network System Details.............................................................. 3.2 Ethernet .................................................................................................... 3.5 Configuring IP Parameters ....................................................................... 3.6 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ...................................... 3.7 RollCall PC Control Panel Screens for the IQH3UM Enclosure ...................... 3.8 Control (1-8) and (9-16)............................................................................ 3.8 Slots (1-8) and (9-16) ............................................................................... 3.10 Setup ........................................................................................................ 3.12 Ethernet .................................................................................................... 3.15 RollCall IP ................................................................................................. 3.15 RollCall ............................. ....................................................................... 3.17 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ...................................... 3.19 Log Server ................................................................................................ 3.21 Logging 1 .................................................................................................. 3.22 Logging 2 .......................... ....................................................................... 3.23 Statistics ................................................................................................... 3.24 Menu System Diagrams ........................................................................... 3.25
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
0.10
IQH3A 3U Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 1
Description IQH3 enclosures offer industry leading, highdensity delivery of modular solutions. The 3U rack unit accepts up to 16 modules. Single and dual PSU versions are available. The enclosures are
fitted with RollCall control and monitoring as standard and includes full SNMP control and monitoring functionality over Ethernet.
Front Panel View
Rear of Mainframe
STATUS
REMOTE
ETHERNET
ROLLNET
Features • • • • • • • • • •
16 single or 8 double width modules (or any combination) Hot swappable redundant power supplies Full SNMP Control & Monitoring of IQ modular cards via Ethernet connection Plug-in gateway communications card to enable RollCall via RollNet, RS422 and RollCall over TCP/IP control Maximize availability through card edge restoration of module on-air configurations via card edge controls or remote application Optimum use of rack space – frames do not require any additional ventilation spacing In-service removable fan Variable fan speed, dependent upon load and ambient temperature Full chassis monitoring, including Inlet and Outlet temperature, fan condition and module status Full CE and UL compliance
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
1.1
IQH3A 3U Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 2
Technical Profile Features Inputs/Outputs Additional Controls via RollCall Remote Control System
RollCall Remote Control .....BNC connector RS422/485 Remote Control 9-pin D-type connector
Full Control via active front panel or RollCall Control Panel PC Application
RollCall/SNMP over TCP/IP 10/100 baseT Ethernet
Preset Controls Unit address code set switches 2 Hex switches 0 to F Communications mode control Select RS485 or RS422 interface
Specifications Module Complement .........8 double width or 16 single width (or combinations of both) fitted vertically Module card dimensions.....100 mm wide, 340 mm long Module rear connector........64 way Module rear panel dimensions 129mm wide (-A versions) 103.4 mm wide(other versions), 40.4 mm (double width) 20 mm (single width) high
Power
Mechanical Temperature Range........... 0 to 40° C operating, -30 to +75° storage. A temperature and load sensitive cooling fan is fitted. Case Type ......................... 3U rack mounting aluminum case Dimensions........................ 483 mmx415 mmx135 mm (w, d, h) Weight ............................... Approximately 8.25 kg without modules. Approximately 15 kg fully populated
Input Voltage Range...........100-250 V 50/60 Hz Input Connector .................. IEC320 Fused 2.5 A(T) Standby Switch...................Behind drop-down front panel Power Consumption ...........225 VA maximum Modules Power Dissipation 141 W maximum Output ................................ +7.5 V and -7.5 V ± 5% Note that all modules have built-in power supply fuses.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
2.1
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Operation This section of the manual assumes that the IQH3S Enclosure has been installed in accordance with the instructions given in the Installation Manual To fully conform with EMC and Safety standards, modules must be correctly installed in the mainframe. Prior to connection of power the user should check the following items: 1. The rear of the mainframe must have a full complement of rear panels. Any vacant slots must have a blank rear panel fitted 2. All mainframe covers and rear panels must be fitted and screwed down using all available fixing holes 3. The mainframe front panel must be in the closed position, with the turnbuckles and screws fastened Control Panels A mainframe and the modules that it contains may be controlled by the following methods: 1. Remotely, control panels connected via the RollCall communications network 2. Remotely, from computers connected via the RollCall communications network 3. Combinations of 1 and 2
The Gateway may be controlled from SNMP managers connected via IP. The RollCall Communications System and Computer Control System RollCall remote control gives a uniquely powerful and flexible system that can be as simple as a single rack unit with control panel, or a powerful multi-master, multi-slave configuration with PC control and monitoring for full station automation. The RollCall command protocol obtains control information from the IQ module being addressed. This unique feature ensures that module updates or additions will not require control system software upgrades - simply plug in and switch on. When the unit (or module) is powered-up the module will normally assume the same set-up conditions that existed at the last power-down. This information is provided by non-volatile memory on the module. Some modules incorporate methods that allow other set-up conditions to exist on power-up; please consult the information specific to each module for details.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.1
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RollCall Network System Details
The IQ Modular system has a flexible and powerful remote control system. The units in the system are joined via a high-speed network. Each box enclosure is a node on the network. A single local area network can have a maximum of 255 nodes with any combination of control panels and modular rack boxes. With the 3U box holding up to 16 cards, the system can accommodate 4080 (255 x 16) cards. Each box is physically addressed via switches on the Remote Control Interface. Network bridges can be used to connect each network to up to 15 others nested up to 4 levels allowing tens of thousands of networks and millions of units to be joined together. The IQH3A enclosure has various interface connections to the RollCall network: 1. RollNet 75 Ohm coaxial BNC running at 2.5 Mb/s. The IQH3S enclosure represents a 2 unit load. 2. RollNet RS485 9 way `D' connector running at 2.5 Mb/s. 3. RollNet RS485 10 way DIN connector running at 2.5 Mb/s. 4. RS422 port running at up to 115.2 Kb/s asynchronous. 5. RJ45 Ethernet running at 10/100 Mb/s (Option) The RS422 and RS485 interfaces share the same D connector. Selection of the interface mode is made by a switch on the card front. This should be up for RS485 RollNet and down for RS422 serial.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.2
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RollNet 75 Ohm Coaxial Interface This interface allows connections of units to a single section of 75 Ohm video cable. Each unit is physically joined via a T-piece connector. Each end of the section is terminated by a 75 Ohm resistor at each end of the cable. The data rate on this interface is 2.5 Mb/s. Each section of cable can be up to 400 m. Example configuration:
3U Box 75 Ohm Network 75 Ohm Terminator
75 Ohm Terminator
3U Box
1U Box
Front Panel
RollNet RS485 Differential Interface Sections of the coaxial network can be joined using the RS485 bus. The RS485 connections are limited to shorter distances but are multi-drop allowing a rich combination of network configurations. The combined total number of units across the coaxial network and the RS485 bus is still 255 nodes and the total network length can be up to 1500m.
The maximum number of hub transitions between any number of nodes on a single local area network is 4.
RollNet RS485 10 way DIN connector RollNet RS485 is also available on a 10 way DIN connector on the Gateway front edge. This can be used to connect an active front panel to the Gateway for configuration purposes. This connector normally drives the LED on the 3U frame front panel.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.3
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RS422 Asynchronous Interface This interface allows a PC running RollCall control software to be connected to the RollCall network without a RollNet interface card. The PC is connected via an RS422 serial port, or an RS232 serial port via a RS422 to RS232 converter (often known as a COM port). RS422 allows longer cable runs and offers better immunity to electrical noise, but usually requires an RS422 to RS232 converter to connect to a PC (Some specialist control PCs support RS422 directly). RS232 allows direct connection to a standard PC serial (COM port), but only supports shorter cable runs of up to 4 meters. Example configuration:
75 Ohm Network Computer
3U Box
RS422
3U Box
A serial device attached to a single IQ rack has access to all devices on the RollCall network. The serial port can also be used for third party connections into the system. This allows PC's or any other serial device access to any of the units within the system. Please consult Snell & Wilcox for details of the port binary protocol. The serial port supports speeds up to 115.2 Kb/s. The RollCall PC software is limited to 57.6 Kb/s.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.4
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Ethernet (Option) This interface allows the 3U box to be connected to a 10/100base-T Ethernet network. PC’s can then connect to the 3U box via TCP/IP. An Ethernet device connected to a single IQ rack has access to all devices on the RollCall network. This interface can be used to connect a PC running the RollCall PC software.
75 Ohm Network
Computer
3U Box Ethernet Infrastructure
3U Box
A PC can control multiple RollCall networks by connecting via RollProxy.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.5
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Configuring IP Parameters You must configure the Gateways IP parameters before you can connect to the Gateway using IP over Ethernet. To do this you must establish a connection to the Gateway using a different communications interface. In each case you need a PC with the RollCall control software installed. You can connect the PC to the Gateway in one of three ways. 1.RollNet If the PC is connected to an existing RollNet network, you can set the Gateway to an unused unit address, add it to the RollNet network and connect to it via RollNet. 2.Serial
You can connect any PC with an RS232 serial (COM) port to the Gateway. By default the Gateway ships configured for RS232 at 38400 baud. Connect the PC COM to the 9 way D type labeled “Remote” on the rear of the 3U enclosure. In the Commtrol window on the PC, go to File | Configure Comms. Select Serial Port, select the correct COM port and set the Baud rate to 38400. You should now be able to connect to the Gateway. 3. IP Crossover Cable You can connect the any PC with a 10Base-T or 100Base-T RJ45 Ethernet port to the Gateway using an RJ45 crossover cable. This looks like a standard RJ45 patch cable, but is wired differently. Connect the crossover cable to the RJ45 ports on the PC and on the rear of the 3U enclosure. Configure the PC to use the following IP parameters: IP address : Subnet mask : Default IP Gateway :
192.168.151.2 255.255.0.0 blank
In the Commtrol window on the PC, go to File | Configure Comms. Select IP Server and set the IP address to 192.168.151.1. You should now be able to connect to the Gateway. In each case you should now be able to connect to the Gateway and configure the IP parameters.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.6
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) (Option) The Gateway can run an SNMP agent which allows direct control of its own controls. Unlike a RollCall IP connection, an SNMP connection is for this 3U box only. If you wish to control other 3U boxes then each must be connected via Ethernet and controlled by SNMP individually. SNMP also provides logging information. Log messages, similar to those sent to a RollCall logserver, can be sent to up to 8 separate destinations (SNMP trap destinations). In order to manage and monitor a 3U box, please consult documentation provided for “SNMP management, control and monitoring”, which would show how you could control a 3U box using CastleRock SNMP Manager. By default, the SNMP agent is enabled. A proprietary SNMP manager (Eg CastleRock SNMPc) must be set up on a PC, also connected to the IP network. A number of MIB modules (text files) have been created that map controls for each card type and provide other mappings. These are required in the SNMP manager operation. At a minimum, to control the gateway, you need the following MIBs: SNELL-WILCOX-SMI.MIB SNELL-WILCOX-TC.MIB SNELL-WILCOX-UNIT.MIB SNELL-WILCOX-PRODUCT-REG.MIB (Id for each card type) SNELL-WILCOX-MODULAR-GATEWAY.mib (Gateway controls)
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.7
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RollCall PC Control Panel Screens for the IQH3S Enclosure Control (1-8) and (9-16) These pages display information about the controllers for each slot. Packet Count When the modules receive commands from control clients the number of commands are counted. If the Update Packet Stats item is checked the number of control packets from the currently selected connected controller and from all connected controllers is shown to the right of the controller address. The number of blind control packets is shown to the right of the blind controller address. If the Update Packet Stats item is unchecked the packet counts will be replaced with dashes (-). Update Packet Stats When checked the packet counts will be updated. When unchecked the packet counts the packet counts will be replaced with dashes (-). Note that the packets are still counted while Update Packet Stats is disabled. When enabled the Gateway will display current totals; they will not restart from zero. [Active Front Panel : Control - Pkt Stats - Update Packet Stats ]
When selected this item will reset all of the packet counters to zero. [Active Front Panel : Control - Pkt Stats - Clear Packet Counts ] Show Session This controls which client is displayed by the other Control menu items. [Active Front Panel : Control - Show Session ]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.8
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Control (1-8) and (9-16) (Continued) These pages show information about control clients. Active Front Panels and RollCall PC programs use a RollCall connection to control a module. RollTrack does not use a connection, it uses Blind control. Blind Control is the ability to control a unit without a connection.
This will disconnect the currently displayed connected controller. [Active Front Panel : Control - Slot n - Disconnect Session ]
Connect This displays the address of the connected controllers. The Show Session control can be used to scroll through the connected controllers. If SNMP is enabled, then the Gateway itself will be shown as one of the controllers, usually the first controller. Packet counts from this controller, and from all connected controllers are displayed to the right. [Active Front Panel : Control - Slot n – Controller Control - Slot n - Con Pkt Count & Control - Slot n - Con Pkt Total ]
Single Session Only When checked this allows only one connected controller to control the module at any one time. [Active Front Panel : Control - Slot n - Single Session Only]
Blind This will display the address of last controller to send the module a blind control packet. Packet counts from blind controllers is shown to the right. [Active Front Panel : Control - Slot n - Last Blind User Control - Slot n - Blind Pkt Count ] Allow Blind Control If the module will be controlled by Blind Control (RollTrack and some third party remote control systems) then Allow Blind must be enabled. If Blind Control is not used then Allow Blind may be disabled, giving protection against incorrectly setup RollTrack sources. [Active Front Panel : Control - Slot n - Allow Blind Control ]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.9
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Slots (1-8) and (9-16) These pages allow each slot to be named and interrogated. Overview Slot Number
Installed Unit Type
Installed Unit ID
Editable Name Bound Type ID Installed Unit Type This shows the type of the module that is fitted in the slot. [Active Front Panel : Slots - Slot n - Installed Unit]
Installed Unit ID This shows the unique Type ID Number of the module that is fitted in the slot. [Active Front Panel : Slots - Slot n - Installed Type]
Examples of Use Intentionally Empty Slot If the slot should not have a module installed the Installed Unit Name widow will show No Unit Fitted and the Installed Unit ID window will show No Unit.
Editable Name This allows a slot to be given a user name e.g. “Chan 1 Encode” and so long as the correct card stays in that slot this name will be used. However, if the card is replaced with an incorrect type e.g. a serial interface, the card will appear by its type generic name e.g. IQCSPI. [Active Front Panel : Slots - Slot n - Name] Bound Type ID The Bound Type function allows the slot to be associated with a particular type of module (e.g. a encoder type 284). If a module matching this type ID is fitted, the Gateway will use the user given name. If an incorrect card type is installed in the slot the RollCall ID will not be correct and the actual card type will be displayed in the module browser.
The editable name widow will be empty and the Bound Type ID widow will show None. In the absence of other modules the Gateway will log Module Status as OK, and show Module Status = OK on the Logging Page.
The names and types may be setup before the installation of the modules. [Active Front Panel : Slots - Slot n - Bound Type]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.10
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Correct Module Fitted
Module Fitted – No Bound Unit
If a module is fitted that matches the bound type then the editable name is used in the network browser.
If a module is fitted in the slot but no bound type is assigned to this slot then the slot will show the generic type name for the module type and will appear in the network browser by its slot number and generic type.
In the absence of other modules the Gateway will log Module Status as OK, and show Module Status = OK on the Logging Page. Module Absent – Unit Bound If the slot should have a particular module fitted (as set by the Bound Unit function) but if no module is fitted the Installed Unit Name widow will show No Unit Fitted and the Installed Unit ID window will show No Unit.
In the absence of other modules the Gateway will log Module Status as 1 Extra Module, and show Module Status = 1 Extra Module on the Logging Page. Incorrect Module Fitted If a module is fitted that does not match the bound type then the editable name will not be used and the generic type and slot number will appear in the network browser.
However, the editable name widow will show the intended name and the Bound Type ID widow will show the intended ID. In the absence of other modules the Gateway will log Module Status as 1 Module Missing, and show Module Status = 1 Module Missing on the Logging Page.
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
In the absence of other modules the Gateway will log Module Status as 1 Wrong Module, and show Module Status = 1 Wrong Module on the Logging Page.
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.11
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Setup This function allows various system functions to be set up. Unit Name This allows the unit to be given a meaningful name. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - System - Setup - Unit Name] Serial Number This shows the serial number of the unit. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Serial Number] Hardware Version This shows the version number of the hardware used in the Gateway. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - System - Setup - Hardware Version] Software version This shows the software version installed. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - System - Setup - Software Version] Build Number This shows the software build number of the unit. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Build Number] Report if PSU’S Missing When these boxes are checked it will allow a missing PSU report to be displayed in the Unit Status area and logged. If two power supply units are fitted, (dual redundancy supply configuration) the Left PSU and the Right PSU items should be selected. If for some reason one of the power supplies is removed a warning will be displayed, indicating which power supply is missing. If only one power supply is fitted, only the corresponding checkbox should be selected and the other cleared. If a PSU is fitted but fails or is turned off then a warning message will always be generated. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Monitor PSUs - Left PSU System - Setup - Monitor PSUs - Right PSU]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
Menu Caches (Module) The Gateway caches module menu sets locally to improve menu upload speeds. In rare circumstances this may cause problems. If problems with module menu uploads are encountered the menu caches can be cleared or caching disabled. Format Now! This deletes the existing module menu caches. The caches will be recreated when the next menu client connects. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup – Format Menu Cache] Enable When this checkbox is set the Gateway will cache module menus sets. Clearing this checkbox will disable caching and increase menu upload times. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup – Enable Menu Cache] Disable Temperature Sensor There is a temperature sensor located at the rear fan. With certain combinations of older 3U frames and modules reading the sensor could potentially cause a communication issue. Setting this control will prevent the Gateway from reading the sensor, eliminating the possibility of this issue occurring. This should only be used if recommended by Snell & Wilcox. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Disable Temp Sensor]
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.12
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Setup (cont) Net Show This function allows a unit to be `hidden' from the network system. When netshow is active the unit broadcasts its presence. Note that if the unit address is changed Netshow will automatically be turned On. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - NetShow]
Allow Blind Control If the Gateway will be controlled by Blind Control then Allow Blind Control must be enabled. If Blind Control is not used then Allow Blind Control may be disabled, giving protection against incorrectly set-up RollTrack sources. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Allow Blind Ctl]
Where Am I? This allows the 3U enclosure to be physically located in a large system.
This control will re-boot the unit. This will terminate any connections to the Gateway and to modules in the 3U frame. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Restart Unit]
When this function is selected the LED indicator on the front panel of the enclosure will flash red and green. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Where Am I?]
Where Am I? Flashing LED
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.13
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Setup (cont) Serial Port Setup Speed This group allows the serial port to be configured. The baud rate is set between 2400 and 115200 baud. The default speed for all RollCall serial connections is 38,400 bps. NB The RollCall PC software only supports speeds up to 57600 baud. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Serial Speed]
SP_IAM This controls whether the Gateway passes wide area I_AM packets from the serial port to the RollCall Network. Normally this is enabled to allow PCs attached to the serial port to be located by other units, but it may be disabled if you wish to control the flow of I_AM packets through a system. NB Pass I_AM (Bridge) overrides both Pass I_AM (Serial) and Pass I_AM (IP). So if Pass I_AM (Bridge) is set I AM messages will be passed over the bridge, irrespective of how the other controls are set. [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Pass I_AM (Serial)] SP_TIME This controls whether the Gateway passes wide area TIME packets from the serial port to the RollCall Network. Normally this is enabled to allow PCs attached to the serial port to be time servers, but it may be disabled if you wish to control the flow of TIME packets through a system. NB The Gateway will always use the received time stamp, whether it passes it on or not (but see also Time from Logger). [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Pass TIME (Serial)] Port Mode This item shows the current operating mode of the serial port (RS422 or RS485). [Active Front Panel: System - Setup - Serial Mode]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.14
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Ethernet (Option)
IMPORTANT NOTE Altering any of these settings whilst connected to the Gateway via IP may result in the connection being lost. If the new values are incorrect it may not be possible to reestablish the connection via IP and a connection via RollNet or the serial port will have to be made to correct the settings. The network administrator should be able to give the correct setting for these controls.
Default Settings The IQ Gateway ships with the following default settings: IP address : 192.168.151.001 Subnet mask : 255.255.000.000 Default IP Gateway : 000.000.000.000. A connection via RollNet, serial or to a PC on a compatible IP address must be established and these parameters configured before the unit can be successfully connected to an Ethernet network. Unit IP Address
The link type and speed may be selected from these items.
This allows the IP address to be entered. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - IP address]
Auto.. This is the default setting. The alternative manual settings may be used if the switch does not support auto selection. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Link speed]
Subnet mask This allows the Subnet mask address to be entered. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Subnet mask]
Link State
Default gateway address This allows the Default IP Gateway address to be entered. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Default IP gateway] IP Routing Setup Status This will display the status of the IP routing. It could show: FAIL . IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address are not compatible with each other. OK.... IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default gateway are compatible. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - IP Routing]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
Link Speed
This shows the current status of the Ethernet link. It will either report 'No Link' or the current link speed. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Link State] MAC address This item will show the MAC address, which is a globally unique number identifying an Ethernet unit. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - MAC address] Ignore Broadcast Packets Warning: This should only be checked if it is possible to resolve IP address to MAC addresses without using the ARP protocol. Please refer to RollCall System Integrators Manual. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Ignore b'cast pkts]
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.15
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Ethernet (Option) (Cont) Check client IP When selected only clients from any of the address ranges listed below would be allowed to control this unit. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Check client IP]
Client IP Ranges This item allows the permitted Client IP address to be entered. The Gateway can be configured with one or more IP client ranges. Each range is specified by a minimum and maximum pair of IP addresses. If Check client IP is set then only connections from clients with IP addresses in one of these ranges will be accepted. To specify single IP address, set a minimum and maximum pair to the same address. Ranges where Min or Max is set at 000.000.000.000 are ignored. NB If Check client IP is checked and no IP ranges are set, no IP connections will be accepted. Altering these items only affect new connections; it will not disconnect existing IP connections. This is to prevent errors breaking the connection being used to make the changes. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Client IP Ranges - Min 1-8 Ethernet - Ethernet - Client IP Ranges - Max 1-8]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.16
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RollCall IP (Option) This page reports various statistics about IP share connections and allows configuration of the IP bridge function. Enable Net Stats If the Enable Net Stats is checked then the various packet counters will be constantly updated. While Update Packet Stats is disabled these will display a dash (-). [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Enable Net Stats] Reset Packet Counts When selected this item will reset all of the packet counters to zero. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Reset Net Stats] IP Share Port The Gateway will accept IP Share connections on this IP port number. The default is 2050. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - IP Share Port] Pass WAN Packets SP_IAM If this checkbox is checked then the Gateway will pass wide area I AM messages received on IP share links to the RollNet network, and over the IP bridge (if connected). NB Pass I_AM (Bridge) overrides both Pass I_AM (Serial) and Pass I_AM (IP). So if Pass I_AM (Bridge) is set I AM messages will be passed over the bridge, irrespective of how the other controls are set. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Pass I_AM (IP)] SP_TIME If this checkbox is checked then the Gateway will pass wide area TIME messages received on IP share links to the RollNet network, and over the IP bridge (if connected). NB The Gateway will always use the received time stamp, whether it passes it on or not (but see also Time from Logger). [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Pass Time (IP)]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.17
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
RollCall IP (Option) (continued) RollCall IP Connections This shows information about IP connections to the Gateway from IP Share or IP Proxy. The information displayed refers to a single connection. Which connection is displayed is controlled by the Show Connection control. IP Address This shows the IP address of the remote unit on this IP connection. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Addr] Port Number This shows which RollCall port on the Gateway this IP connection corresponds to. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - RollCall Port] Port Name This shows the name under which this IP connection appears. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Name] Ever Sent Time? This shows if the remote unit on this IP connection has ever sent us a TIME packet. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Ever Sent Time?]
RollCall IP History
Start Time This shows the time at which this IP connection was started. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Start Time]
Last Rejected Client This shows the IP address of the last client that the Gateway rejected. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Last Reject Client]
Packets Received This shows how many packets have been received on this IP connection. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Packets Received]
Reject Count This shows the number of attempted IP connections that this Gateway has rejected. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Reject Count]
Packets Sent This shows how many packets have been transmitted on this IP connection. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Packets Sent]
Last Closed Client IP address of the last client (bridge or other) to close their connection to gateway. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Last Closed Client]
Show Connection This controls which IP connection the Gateway shows statistics for. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - Ethernet - Pass Time (IP)]
Closed Count This shows how many IP connections have been closed. The count includes connections that have been closed by the Gateway and by the remote client. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - RollCall IP Stats - Closed Count]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
The Gateway may reject IP connections if they do not match the client address set or if the limit on IP connections has been reached.
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.18
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) (Option) Overview This page allows configuration of the SNMP agent that operates within the gateway card. Note that in order for the SNMP to operate the TCP/IP stack and Ethernet must be enabled and a physical connection available. Enable SNMP This enables or disables the SNMP functions of the Gateway. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Enable SNMP]
Read community Configures the SNMP read community value. Default value "public". [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Read community]
MIB2 sysContact Customer given name of person responsible for equipment. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - MIB2 sysContact]
MIB2 sysLocation Customer given physical or logical location of system. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - MIB2 sysLocation ]
Write community Configures the SNMP write community value. Default value "private”. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Write community] MIB2 sysName Name of system if applicable. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - MIB2 sysName]
Read Write Port TCP/IP port number (range:1-65535) used in all SET and GET SNMP operations. Default is 161. The SNMP manager should match this value to operate correctly. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Read Write Port]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.19
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
SNMP (Option) (Continued)
Resend All Traps Action: resends all current traps/notifications for all occupied slots and gateway card. If legacy operation is enabled, the associated traps are also sent. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Resend Traps]
Traps The Gateway supports up to eight trap destinations. For each trap the user can configure: IP address The IP address, format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, to which notifications (traps) are sent. This address should correspond to the IP address of the PC monitoring notifications. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Traps - Trap Dest n Trap dest IP addr ]
Port The connection port address used to send notifications. The target machine (IP address) should be configured to "listen" for notifications on this port. The SNMP default is 162, but other port numbers may be used. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Traps - Trap Dest n Trap dest port]
Community Trap Community string. This string is included within the SNMP trap message . [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Traps - Trap Dest n Trap community]
Enable Enable this Trap destination. Trap dest 1 is always enabled when SNMP is enabled, so it has no enable control. [Active Front Panel: Ethernet - SNMP - Traps - Trap Dest n Enable Trap]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.20
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Log Server This menu allows the characteristics of the logging server to be specified. LogServer Name The Logging Server to be used may be named by editing the text string in the text window. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - LogServer Name] Log Disabled If this item is checked the Logging function will be disabled. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Log to - Logging Disabled] Named server If this item is checked Logging information will only be sent to the server named in the name window. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Log to - Named LogServer] Any Logger If this item is checked Logging information will be sent to any Logger on the system. It is suggested that if there is only one server on the system, this option should be chosen [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Log to - Any LogServer] Using This displays the name and RollCall address of the current Log Server. If the Gateway does not have a logserver this will show “No Active Logger” [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Cur. Logger Logging - Log Server - Cur. Logger Addr]
Last Time source This shows the address from which the last time packet was received. This can be useful in configuring complex networks. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Last Time addr]
Only Accept Time from Logserver If this is selected the Gateway will only use time packets from the current logserver. This can be useful in configuring complex networks. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Time from Logger]
Accept logserver via RollNet If this is selected, the Gateway will accept servers packets via the RollNet port. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Accept via RollNet] Accept logserver via IP If this is selected, the Gateway will accept servers packets via the IP port. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Accept via IP] Accept logserver via Serial If this is selected, the Gateway will accept servers packets via the serial port. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Server - Accept via Serial]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.21
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Logging 1 This page shows the information made available via RollCall logging, and allows the user to specify which fields will be logged. Each log field is shown on a separate line. Each has an enable checkbox, a descriptive name, the log field header and the current value. The only exception is Serial Number, which is always logged and therefore has no enable checkbox. When the checkbox is checked that field will be logged to the logserver. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Field_Name Logging - Field_Name = ]
Field Name SN VERSION BUILD_NUMBER OS_VERSION HARDWARE_VERSION IPADDRESS MODULE_STATUS
Meaning Serial Number Software Version Number Software Build Number Operating System Version Hardware version Number IP Address of the Gateway Shows if the installed modules match the set bound types, or if there are extra, missing or mismatched modules.
SESSIONS
FAULT
Number of connected control sessions. Not that if SNMP is enabled this will show one session for the SNMP agent. Last time at which a control was altered by a controller Records various fault conditions
PSU_1_NAME PSU_1_STATE
Name of 1st Power Supply Unit State of 1st Power Supply Unit
PSU_2_NAME PSU_2_STATE
Name of 2nd Power Supply Unit State of 2nd Power Supply Unit
LAST_MODIFIED
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Possible Values Serial Number of Unit E.g. 3.2.11 E.g. 0148903165 E.g. V115 Release E.g. RCIF3U2Y.00/ IP Address as dotted string OK 1 EXTRA MODULE n EXTRA MODULES 1 MODULE MISSING n MODULES MISSING 1 WRONG TYPE n WRONG TYPES Number of Sessions
Time stamp at which a control packet was received (ISO 8601 format) OK FAIL:Local Temp Sensor Failed FAIL:Rear Temp Sensor LM80 Not Found FAIL: Rear Temp Sensor LM80 Failed Left PSU OK FAIL FAIL:Not Fitted Not Used Right PSU OK FAIL FAIL:Not Fitted Not Used
Version 1 Issue 1
3.22
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Logging 2 This page shows the information made available via RollCall logging, and allows the user to specify which fields will be logged. Each log field is shown on a separate line. Each has an enable checkbox, a descriptive name, the log field header and the current value. When the checkbox is checked that field will be logged to the logserver. [Active Front Panel: Logging - Log Field_Name Logging - Field_Name = ] Field Name TEMP_1_NAME TEMP_1_STATE
Meaning Name of 1st temperature sensor State of 1st temperature
TEMP_1_CELSIUS TEMP_2_NAME TEMP_2_STATE
Value of of 1st temperature Name of 2nd temperature sensor
TEMP_2_CELSIUS FAN_1_NAME FAN_1_STATE
Value of of 2nd temperature Name of Fan State of Fan
MODULE COMMS
Faults on the module communications bus
VOLTAGE_1_NAME VOLTAGE_1_STATE
Name of 1st Voltage State of 1st Voltage
VOLTAGE_1_VALUE VOLTAGE_2_NAME
Value of 1st Voltage Name of 2nd Voltage
VOLTAGE_2_STATE
State of 2nd Voltage
VOLTAGE_2_VALUE
Value of 2nd Voltage
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Possible Values Temperature In OK WARN:Low (0≤temp -6.8v) Value in Volts
Version 1 Issue 1
3.23
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3
Statistics This menu can display various errors that may occur within a system. In the event of a problem these error messages may be quoted to Snell & Wilcox customer support to assist debugging. Reset Stats Selecting this function will reset all statistics to zero. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Reset Net Stats] Enable Net Stats This item must be selected to enable the error counts to be updated. If this checkbox is not sent all statistics will be displayed as '-'. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Enable Net Stats] Data Length Errors This counts packets that are an incorrect length. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Length Errs]
Recons This counts network reconfigurations. Network reconfigurations are normal events when units join or leave the network. They may also occur occasionally due to electrical interference.
Destination Errors This counts packets that have an incorrect destination identifier. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Destination Errs] Source Errors This counts packets that have an incorrect source identifier. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Source Errs] Packet Type Errors This counts packets that have an incorrect packet type. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Bad Packet Errs] Routing Errors This counts packets that cannot be routed to the indicated destination. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Routing Errs]
Constant reconfigurations indicate a physical fault. Possible faults include. • Faulty T piece or cable • Missing termination(s) • Incorrect value of termination(s) • Clash of a RollCall Address • Network cable length exceeded* • Number of unit loads per segment exceeded* *Please refer to RollCall System Integrators Manual. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Recons] Module Comms Errors This counts errors on the I2C bus. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Module Comms Errors]
Dropped Packets This counts packets that cannot be delivered. [Active Front Panel: System - Statistics - Packet Drops]
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.24
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3 Main Menu
Slots Slot 1... Slot 3... Slot 5... Slot 7... Slot 9... Slot 11... Slot 13... Slot 15...
Slots... Control... Ethernet...
Slot 2... Slot 4... Slot 6... Slot 8... Slot 10... Slot 12... Slot 14... Slot 16...
System... Logging
Statistics Control Slot 1... Slot 2... Slot 3... Slot 4... Slot 5... Slot 6... Slot 7... Slot 8... Slot 9... Slot 10... Slot 11... Slot 12... Slot 13... Slot 14... Slot 15... Slot 16... Show Session Pkt Stats
Slot 1 to 16 Installed Type Installed Unit Name Bound Type
See Page 26
Bound Type
Reset Net Stats Enable Net Stats Length Errs Source Errs Destination Errs Routing Errs Bad Packet Errs Packet Drops Recons Module Comms Errors
Errors/Drops
Bound Type
Show Session
144
Show Session
Preset
14 Preset
Name Name Decoder Ch 3 Clear Preset
System Setup... Statistics...
Packet Statistics OK
Installed Unit Installed Unit
IQCSPI Installed Type
Update Packet Stats Clear Packet Counts
Slot 1 to 16 Allow Blind Control Single Session Only Controller Last Blind User Con Pkt Count Con Pkt Total Blind PKT Count Disconnect Session
Installed Type
127
Blind Pkt Count Blind Pkt Count
43690 Preset
Con Pkt Total Con Pkt Total
43690 Preset
Con Pkt Count Con Pkt Count
43690 Preset
Last Blind User Last Blind User
0000:2F:00
Logging Log Server... SN= Log Software Ver. VERSION= Log OS Version OS_VERSION= Log Build Number BUILD_NUMBER= Log Hardware Ver. HARDWARE_VERSION= Log Module Status MODULE_STATUS= Log Gway Ctrl Sess SESSIONS= Log Last Modified LAST_MODIFIED= Log IP Address IPADDRESS= Log PSU 1 Name PSU_1_NAME= Log PSU 1 State PSU_1_STATE= Log PSU 2 Name PSU_2_NAME= Log PSU 2 State PSU_2_STATE= Log Temp 1 Name TEMP_1_NAME= Log Temp 1 State TEMP_1_STATE= Log Temp 1 Celsius TEMP_1_CELSIUS= Log Temp 2 Name TEMP_2_NAME= Log Temp 2 State TEMP_2_STATE= Log Temp 2 Celsius TEMP_2_CELSIUS= Log Fan 1 Name FAN_1_NAME= Log Fan 1 State FAN_1_STATE= Log Voltage 1 Name VOLTAGE_1_NAME= Log Voltage 1 State VOLTAGE_1_STATE= Log Voltage 1 Value VOLTAGE_1_VALUE= Log Voltage 2 Name VOLTAGE_2_NAME= Log Voltage 2 State VOLTAGE_2_STATE= Log Voltage 2 Value VOLTAGE_2_VALUE= Log Faults FAULT= Log Module Comms MODULE_COMMS= Fan Status
Errors/Drops 000000000 OK
Setup Unit Name Serial Number Hardware Version Software Version Build Number NetShow Allow Blind Control Where Am I? Serial Speed... Serial Mode Pass I_AM (Serial) Pass TIME (Serial) Monitor PSUs... Disable Temp Sensor Restart Unit Format Menu Cache Enable Menu Cache
Monitor PSUs Left PSU Right PSU
Serial Mode RCIF3U2Y.00X OK
Serial Speed 115200 bps 57600 bps 38400 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps
Software Version Build Number Build Number Software Version 0045601367 2.12. 6 OK OK
Preset
Log Values Controller
Software Version
Log Values 172.19.77.5
Software Version
Controller OK
0000:2F:00
OK
Preset
Log Server Hardware Version
Remote Control Interface Menu System (RCIF 3U2 Gateway)
Log to... LogServer Name Cur. Logger Cur. Logger Addr Last Time addr Time from Logger Accept via IP Accept via Serial Accept via RollNet
RCIF3U2Y.00X OK
Serial Number Seial Number Xxxxxxxx OK
Log to Logging Disabled Named LogServer Any LogServer
Unit Name Unirt Name Xxxxxxxx OK
IQH3OPSV3
18/01/06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
3.25
IQH3A Enclosure V3 Upgrade
SECTION 3 Main Menu Slots... Control... Ethernet...
Ethernet Ethernet
Ethernet RollCall IP Status SNMP IP Bridge
IP address Subnet mask Default IP gateway IP Share Port Link speed Link State MAC address IP Routing Ignore b'cast pkts Check client IP Client IP Ranges Pass I_AM (IP) Pass Time (IP)
IP Bridge
Max 1 Max 2 Max 3 Max 4 Max 5 Max 6 Max 7 Max 8
Min/Max Ranges Min/Max 1-8 172.19.81.1 Clear Preset
Bridge IP Addr Bridge IP Port Only this Addr Pass I_AM (Bridge) Pass Time (Bridge) Connect Disconnect Auto Connect Addr Packets Received Packets Sent Start Time Started By
RollCall IP Stats
Client IP Ranges Min 1 Min 2 Min 3 Min 4 Min 5 Min 6 Min 7 Min 8
Reject Count Last Reject Client Closed Count Last Closed Client Connection RollCall Port Name Addr Packets Received Packets Sent Ever Sent Time? Start Time
Started By Started By Local
Start Time Start Time 02/09/2005 16:03:24
OK OK
Start Time OK
Start Time 02/09/2005 16:03:24
Ever Sent Time? Ever Sent Time? Yes
IP Routing
OK OK
IP Routing
Packets Sent
OK
Packets Sent 177
Packets Sent
OK
Packets Sent 177
MAC address
OK OK
MAC Address 000581 - 000021
Packets Received OK
Packets Received 180
Packets Received Packets Received 180
Link State
OK OK
Link State
Addr
10 Mbps Full
Addr 172.19.77.5
Addr
OK
Addr 172.19.77.5
Link speed
OK OK
Auto 10 Mbps half 10 Mbps full 100 Mbps half 100 Mbps full
Bridge IP Port Bridge IP Port 2600 Clear Preset
Name Name Control PC
IP Share Port IP Share Port 2050 Clear Preset
Bridge IP Addr Bridge IP Addr 172.019.081.032 Clear Preset
RollCall Port OK RollCall Port BE
Connection
OK
Enable SNMP Enable Legacy SNMP Read community Write community MIB2 sysContact MIB2 sysName MIB2 sysLocation Read Write Port Resend Traps Traps...
Connection
1 OK
OK
Last Closed Client Last Closed Client 172.19.77.5
IP address IP address 192.168.151. 1 Clear Preset
OK
OK
Closed Count
Traps
SNMP Items SNMP Items Public Clear Preset
OK
Closed Count 4 OK
OK
Trap dest IP addr Trap dest port Trap community Enable Trap
OK
Trap Items xxxxx Clear Preset
Trap Items
Reject Count Closed Count 0
18/01/06
Trap Dest 1... Trap Dest 2... Trap Dest 3... Trap Dest 4... Trap Dest 5... Trap Dest 6... Trap Dest 7... Trap Dest 8...
Trap Dest 1 to 8
Last Reject Client Last Reject Client 0.0.0.0
IQH3OPSV3
OK
OK
SNMP
Subnet mask Subnet mask 255.255. 0. 0 Clear Preset
OK
OK
Default IP gateway Default IP gateway 192.168.151.1. Clear Preset
System... Logging
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 1
OK
3.26
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32 Intelligent Reclocking High Performance HD-SDI/SD-SDI Distribition Amplifiers
Operator’s Manual
© April 2009 Snell & Wilcox Ltd., Southleigh Park House, Eastleigh Road, Havant, Hants, PO9 2PE, United Kingdom. For General Enquiry's contact: Tel: +44 (0) 2392 489000 Fax: +44 (0)23 9245 1411 For Technical assistance contact: Tel: +44 (0) 2392 489058 Fax: +44 (0) 2392 489057 Web: http://www.snellwilcox.com/support Ftp: ftp://ftp.snellwilcox.com/support
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Contents Module Descriptions ..................................................................................................................... 1 IQSDA30 Module Description.................................................................................................. 1 IQSDA32 Module Description.................................................................................................. 1 Rear Panel Views ......................................................................................................................... 2 IQSDA30 Rear Panel View...................................................................................................... 2 IQSDA32 Rear Panel View...................................................................................................... 2 Order Codes ................................................................................................................................. 3 Features........................................................................................................................................ 3 IQSDA30 Feature Summary.................................................................................................... 3 IQSDA32 Feature Summary.................................................................................................... 3 Technical Profile ........................................................................................................................... 4 IQSDA30 Technical Profile ...................................................................................................... 4 IQSDA32 Technical Profile ...................................................................................................... 5 Connections.................................................................................................................................. 7 IQSDA30 Connections............................................................................................................. 7 IQSDA32 Connections............................................................................................................. 7 Card Edge Controls ...................................................................................................................... 8 IQSDA30 ................................................................................................................................. 8 IQSDA32 ................................................................................................................................. 8 Controlling the IQSDA30/32 from the RollCall Control Panel ..................................................... 10 Unit Status ............................................................................................................................. 10 Input....................................................................................................................................... 11 Memory 1-16.......................................................................................................................... 12 Logging .................................................................................................................................. 13 RollTrack................................................................................................................................ 14 Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 16 Operation from an Active Control Panel ..................................................................................... 17 Information Window ............................................................................................................... 17 Control Window ..................................................................................................................... 17 Manual Revision Record............................................................................................................. 18
i
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Module Descriptions IQSDA30 Module Description Dual Channel 3G/HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier with RollCall The IQSDA30 provides dual inputs with 3 outputs per input for distribution of HDSDI 3 Gbit/s, 1.5 Gbit/s or 270 Mbit/s SD-SDI signals in a single width package. Its 80m 3G, 180m HD input equalization performance and non re-clocking distribution of wide-band signals make it ideal for all distribution applications. For HD/SD only applications an HD/SD-SDI version is available, with an option to upgrade firmware for 3Gbps operation when required. 1 1
SDI RX
Signal Equalisation
Rate Detection
Re-clocker
SDI TX
2 3
Re-clock Bypass 1
2
SDI RX
Signal Equalisation
Rate Detection
2 Re-clocker
SDI TX 3
Re-clock Bypass
Outputs
Inputs
Built-in Intelligence
Network intelligence, control and monitoring
IQSDA32 Module Description 3G/HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier with RollCall The IQSDA32 is a distribution amplifier for HD-SDI 3 Gbit/s, 1.5 Gbit/s or 270 Mbit/s SD-SDI signals providing 7 equalized and reclocked outputs of the input in a single width package. Its 80m 3G, 180m HD input equalization performance and non re-clocking distribution of wide-band signals make it ideal for all distribution applications. For HD/SD only applications an HD/SD-SDI version is available, with an option to upgrade firmware for 3Gbps operation when required. 1 2 3 1
SDI RX
Signal Equalisation
Rate Detection
Re-clocker
SDI TX
4 5
Re-clock Bypass
6
Input
Network intelligence, control and monitoring
Page 1
Outputs
7 Built-in Intelligence
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Rear Panel Views IQSDA30 Rear Panel View 2
1
1
2
IQSDA3 _47-1A
3
3 SER OUT 1
SER IN 1
SER OUT 2
SER IN 2
IQSDA32 Rear Panel View 2
3
5
IQSDA3 _47-1A
1 SERIAL OUT
SERIAL IN
4
6
7 SERIAL OUT
These modules can only be fitted into ‘A’ style enclosures as shown below. Enclosure order codes IQH3A-S-0, IQH3A-S-P
Enclosure order codes IQH3A-E-0, IQH3A-E-P, IQH3A-0-0, IQH3A-0-P
Enclosure order code IQH1A-S-P
Page 2
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Order Codes IQSDA30
IQSDA3047-1A Dual Channel HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier. 2 inputs, 3 outputs per input IQSDA3047-1A3 Dual Channel 3G/HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier. 2 inputs, 3 outputs per input IQSDA30-3G Upgrade for IQSDA3047-1A Dual Channel HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier to operate with 3Gbps SDI signals
IQSDA32
IQSDA3247-1A HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier. 1 input, 7 outputs IQSDA3247-1A3 3G/HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier. 1 input, 7 outputs IQSDA32-3G Upgrade for IQSDA3247-1A HD/SD-SDI Reclocking Distribution Amplifier to operate with 3Gbps SDI signals
Features IQSDA30 Feature Summary • • • •
• •
Dual channel Intelligent 3Gbps SDI, HD-SDI and SD-SDI re-clocking distribution amplifier Will distribute DVB-ASI and other wide-band signals Equalizes up to 80m at 3 Gbit/s, 180m at 1.5 Gbit/s and more than 350m at 270 Mbit/s when using Belden 1694A cable Standards supported: 3G-HD to SMPTE424M HD-SDI to SMPTE292M SD-SDI to SMPTE259M-C DVB-ASI RollCall monitoring allows all signal paths to be managed Extremely compact – up to 32 channels in 3RU - for use where space is at a premium
IQSDA32 Feature Summary • • • •
•
Intelligent 3Gbps SDI, HD-SDI and SD-SDI re-clocking distribution amplifier Will distribute DVB-ASI and other wide-band signals Equalizes up to 80m at 3 Gbit/s, 180m at 1.5 Gbit/s and more than 350m at 270 Mbit/s when using Belden 1694A cable Standards supported: 3G-HD to SMPTE424M HD-SDI to SMPTE292M SD-SDI to SMPTE259M-C DVB-ASI RollCall monitoring allows all signal paths to be managed
Page 3
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Technical Profile IQSDA30 Technical Profile Inputs and Outputs Signal Inputs SDI Inputs
2x
Input Cable Length
Up to 80m Belden 1694A @ 3 Gbit/s Up to 180m Belden 1694A @ 1.5 Gbit/s Up to 350m Belden 1694A @ 270 Mbit/s
Signal Outputs SDI Outputs
x3 per input (Outputs 1 and 3 are DVB-ASI compatible)
Controls Indicators Power
OK (Green)
CPU
OK (Green Flashing)
Input 1
OK(Green), Bypass (Amber), Loss (Red)
Input 2
OK(Green), Bypass (Amber), Loss (Red)
RollCall Functions Input 1 (2) select
Auto, 3G, HD, SD, DVB-ASI, Bypass
Input Status
Present, Loss/Unknown, Data Rate
Logging
Input 1 (2) Type Input 1 (2) Data Rate Input 1 (2) Present Input 1 (2) Error Input 1 (2) Loss
RollTrack Controls
On/Off, Index, Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending.
RollTrack Outputs
Unused Input 1 (2) Present Input 1 (2) Rate Unknown Input 1 (2) Loss Input 1(2) 3G Input 1(2) HD Input 1(2) SD
Other Controls User Memories
Name, save and recall 16 user memories
Page 4
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Specifications Electrical
3Gbit/s SDI, SMPTE 424M 1.5Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C / DVB-ASI
Connector / Format
BNC/ 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Return loss
>-15dB (270Mbit/s, 1.5Gbit/s) >-10dB (3Gbit/s)
Output Jitter
SD-SDI 0.2 UI (10Hz) / 0.2 UI (1KHz) 3G/HD-SDI 1.0 UI (10Hz) / 0.2 UI (100KHz)
Module Power Consumption
3W max.
IQSDA32 Technical Profile Inputs and Outputs Signal Inputs HD/SD-SDI Input
1x
Input Cable Length
Up to 80m Belden 1694A @ 3 Gbit/s Up to 180m Belden 1694A @ 1.5 Gbit/s Up to 350m Belden 1694A @ 270 Mbit/s
Signal Outputs SDI Outputs
x7 (1, 3, 5, 7 DVD-ASI compatible)
Controls Indicators Power
OK (Green)
CPU
OK (Green Flashing)
Input 1
OK(Green), Bypass (Amber), Loss (Red)
RollCall Functions Input 1 select
Auto, 3G, HD, SD, DVB-ASI, Bypass
Input Status
Present, Loss/Unknown, Data Rate
Logging
Input 1 Type Input 1 Data Rate Input 1 Present Input 1 Error Input 1 Loss
RollTrack Controls
On/Off, Index, Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending.
Page 5
Version 1 Issue 1
RollTrack Outputs
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Unused Input 1 Present Input 1 Rate Unknown Input 1 Loss Input 1 3G Input 1 HD Input 1 SD
Other Controls User Memories
Name, save and recall 16 user memories
Specifications Electrical
3Gbit/s SDI, SMPTE 424M 1.5Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C / DVB-ASI
Connector / Format
BNC/ 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Return loss
>-15dB (270Mbit/s, 1.5Gbit/s) >-10dB (3Gbit/s)
Output Jitter
SD-SDI 0.2 UI (10Hz) / 0.2 UI (1KHz) 3G/HD-SDI 1.0 UI (10Hz) / 0.2 UI (100KHz)
Module Power Consumption
3W max.
Page 6
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Connections IQSDA30 Connections Inputs Serial digital input to the unit is made via 2 BNC connectors, which terminate in 75 Ohms. 2
1
1
2
IQSDA3 _47-1A
3
3 SER OUT 1
SER IN 1
SER OUT 2
SER IN 2
Outputs Serial digital output from the unit is made via 6 BNC connectors (3 per input), which terminate in 75 Ohms. Outputs 1 and 3 are DVB-ASI compatible. 2
1
1
2
IQSDA3 _47-1A
3
3 SER OUT 1
SER IN 1
SER OUT 2
SER IN 2
IQSDA32 Connections Input Serial digital input to the unit is made via a single BNC connector, which terminates in 75 Ohms. 2
3
5
IQSDA3 _47-1A
1 SERIAL OUT
SERIAL IN
6
7
4
SERIAL OUT
Outputs Serial digital output from the unit is made via 7 BNC connectors, which terminate in 75 Ohms. Outputs 1, 3, 5, and 7 are DVB-ASI compatible. 2
3
5
IQSDA3 _47-1A
1 SERIAL OUT
SERIAL IN
Page 7
4
6
7 SERIAL OUT
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Card Edge Controls IQSDA30
IQSDA32
The LEDs on the edge of the module indicate its operating status. Power OK
This indicator is illuminated when a positive power supply is present.
CPU
This indicator will blink to indicate CPU activity.
Channel 1 OK
This indicator is illuminated when input channel 1 is locked to the input signal.
Channel 1 Bypass
This indicator is illuminated when the signal on input channel 1 is not being reclocked. That is, in reclock bypass mode.
Channel 1 Error
This indicator is illuminated when there is unknown or no input on input channel 1.
Channel 1 Rate
This indicator pair shows the rate on input channel 1 as follows: · Both LEDs illuminated – 3 Gbit/s · Left LED only illuminated – 1.5 Gbit/s · Right LED only illuminated – 270 Mbit/s · Both LEDs off – Rate unknown
Channel 2 OK
This indicator is illuminated when input channel 2 is locked to the input signal.
Channel 2 Bypass
This indicator is illuminated when the signal on input channel 2 is not being reclocked. That is, in reclock bypass mode.
Channel 2 Error
This indicator is illuminated when there is unknown or no input on input channel 2.
Page 8
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Channel 2 Rate
This indicator pair shows the rate on input channel 2 as follows: · Both LEDs illuminated – 3 Gbit/s · Left LED only illuminated – 1.5 Gbit/s · Right LED only illuminated – 270 Mbit/s · Both LEDs off – Rate unknown
Page 9
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Controlling the IQSDA30/32 from the RollCall Control Panel Unit Status Information about the status of the unit is displayed in the Unit Status section on each RollCall Control Panel screen.
The first two lines of the Unit Status display the input status, detected rate, and input selection method for Input 1. The third and fourth lines of the Unit Status display the same information for Input 2.
Page 10
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Input The input screen enables the type of input signal to be selected.
Input 1 SDI Rate • Auto: When selected, the unit will automatically detect and reclock any valid input signal, and the detected rate will be displayed in the Unit Status. If anything else is detected, the output will not be reclocked. If the On Input Loss / Mute option is selected, the output will be muted; or, if the On Input Loss / Pass option is selected, the output will be passed through. •
SD/DVB-ASI (270 Mb): When selected, the unit will reclock only SD/DVBASI (270 Mb) signals. When selected, the On Input Loss controls are greyed out and are inactive. If any other standard is applied to the unit the output will be muted.
•
HD (1.5 Gb): When selected, the unit will reclock only HD (1.5 Gb) signals. When selected, the On Input Loss controls are greyed out and are inactive. If any other standard is applied to the unit the output will be muted.
•
3G (3 Gb): When selected, the unit will reclock only 3G (3 Gb) signals. When selected, the On Input Loss controls are greyed out and are inactive. If any other standard is applied to the unit the output will be muted.
Page 11
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32 •
Reclock Bypass: When selected, the unit will not reclock the input signal. If a supported rate is detected, the Unit Status will display the detected rate, otherwise, *** will be displayed. If the On Input Loss / Mute option is selected, the output will be muted whenever a recoginized rate is not detected; or, if the On Input Loss / Pass option is selected, any signal standard, frequency, etc… will pass through.
Output 1 • Mute: When selected, this option applies a mute on Output 1. • On Input loss / Mute: When selected, if the Input signal is lost, the output signal will be muted. • On Input loss / Pass: When selected, if the input signal is lost, it will be passed unchanged. Input 2 SDI Rate and Output 2 (IQSDA30 only) These options are the same as the Input 1 SDI Rate and Output 1 options but are applied to Input 2 and Output 2.
Memory 1-16 Use the Memory function to save up to 16 setups to be recalled later. Default memory names can be changed to provide more meaningful descriptions.
To save settings:
Page 12
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32 •
In the Save Memory column, select a memory location, and then click Save. The current settings are saved and the memory appears in the Recall Memory column.
To change a memory name: •
In the Save Memory Name field, type the new memory name, and then cliclick S. To return the memory to its default value, click the preset button (P).
Use the Recall Memory function to recall the settings saved in a memory location. Last Recalled Memory displays the most recently recalled memory. If a control is changed after a has been recalled Last Recalled Memory will display an asterisk behind the memory name. To recall a memory: •
In the Recall Memory column, select the memory to recall. The recalled settings will be applied and the memory name will appear in the Last Recalled Memory section.
Logging Information about several parameters can be made available to a logging device that is connected to the RollCall network.
Each logging screen comprises three columns: • • •
Log Enable: Select the check boxes that correspond to the parameters for which log information should be collected. Log Field: Displays the name of the logging field. Log Value: Displays the current log value.
Page 13
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32 RollCall Log Fields Log Field
Log Value
SN=
OS_VERSION=
BUILD_NUMBER=
HARDWARE_VERSION=
UPTIME=
LICENSED_OPTIONS=
The options avaiable on the module’s licence. For example, SDHD; 3G.
INPUT_N_IDENT=
INPUT_N_NAME=
INPUT_N_TYPE=
INPUT_N_STATE=
OK, WARN, FAIL
INPUT_N_SDIRATE=
RollTrack The RollTrack settings allow information to be sent, by means of the RollCall network, to other compatible units on the same network. Use the settings on the RollTrack screen to: • • • • •
Enable or disable the RollTrack functions. Configure up to 16 RollTrack outputs. Specify the conditions that trigger RollTrack data transmission. Set RollTrack destinations. Specify the RollTrack commands to be sent.
RollTrack Sources The RollTrack Source specifies the source of the information that triggers the transmission of data.
Page 14
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32 RollTrack Addresses The full RollTrack Address comprises four sets of numbers. For example, 0000:10:01*99. The first set, 0000 in the example, is the network segment code number. The second set, 10 in the example, identifies the (enclosure/mainframe) unit. The third set, 01 in the example, identifies the slot number in the unit. The fourth set, 99 in the example, is a user-configured number that uniquely identifies the destination unit in a multi-unit system. This ensures that only the correct unit responds to commands. If left at 00, an incorrectly fitted unit may respond inappropriately. RollTrack Commands Each RollTrack command comprises two sets of numbers, for example, 33039:3. The first set, 33039 in the example, is the RollTrack command number, which identifies the command. The second set, 3 in the example, is the value that is sent with the command. Using RollTracks To enable or disable RollTrack functions: • •
To enable the RollTrack functions, clear the Disable All check box. To disable RollTrack functions, select the Disable All check box.
To configure a RollTrack action: 1. Select the Index number. This identifies the RollTrack action being configured. Up to 16 RollTrack actions can be created. 2. From the Source list, select the source of the information that will trigger RollTrack transmission. 3. Enter the RollTrack Address and click S. To return the address to its default value, click the preset button (P). 4. Enter the RollTrack Command and click S. To return the value to its default, click the preset button (P). Viewing RollTrack Information RollTrack Sending and RollTrack Status display information about the status of RollTracks. RollTrack Sending displays the information when the unit is actively sending a RollTrack command: • No: The command is not being sent. • Yes: The command is being sent. RollTrack Status displays the status of the currently selected RollTrack Index: • • • • •
OK: RollTrack message sent and received OK. Unknown: RollTrack message has been sent but has not yet completed. Timeout: RollTrack message sent, but acknowledgement not received. This could be because the destination unit is not at the specified location. Bad: RollTrack message has not been sent correctly, acknowledged at the destination unit. This could be because the destination unit is not of the type specified. Disabled: RollTrack sending is disabled.
Page 15
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Setup The Setup screen displays basic information about the unit. Use the functions on the screen to restart the unit, return all settings to their factory defaults, and to change the names of the inputs.
On the Setup screen, the following information is displayed: • • • • • •
Product: This displays the name of the module. Software Version: This displays the currently installed software version number. Serial No: This displays the unit’s serial number. Build: This displays the factory build number. This number identifies all parameters of the unit. KOS: This displays the operating system version number. PCB: This displays the PCB revision number.
To reboot the unit, simulating a power-up/power-down cycle, click Restart. To reset all of the unit’s settings to their factory defaults, leaving user memories intact, click Default Settings. To reset all of the unit’s settings to their factory defaults, click Factory Defaults.
Note:
Resetting the unit to its factory defaults will also clear all the saved memory settings
Input 1 Name and Input 2 Name These are the input names displayed in logging. To change the name of Input 1 or Input 2, type the name in the text field and click S. To return the name to its factory default, click P.
Page 16
Version 1 Issue 1
IQSDA30 / IQSDA32
Operation from an Active Control Panel The module can be operated from an active control panel via the RollCall™ network. All operational parameters and selections described in the previous section are made using a system of menus displayed in the two LCD windows – the Information window and the Control window.
Information Window The information window contains four lines of text indicating the current state of the unit.
Control Window The Control window displays all selection menus and sub-menus. The main or top level menu allows various sub-menus to be selected by pressing the button adjacent to the required text line. Note that where a menu item is followed by three dots (...) this indicates that a further sub-menu may be selected. Whenever a menu item is selected the parameters of that selection will be displayed in the Information window of the front panel. Where the selection is purely a mode selection and does not enable a sub-menu, the text will become reversed (white-on-black) indicating that the mode is active. If the mode is not available for selection the text will remain normal.
Page 17
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
C
IQAVDR Video Distribution Amplifier Module Description
C
The IQAVDR is a broadcast quality 10/4-output distribution amplifier with adjustable gain, and equalization. An on-board processor identifies the incoming signal standard/format. Automatic gain and equalization adjustment is available for composite signals. The input is a loop-through and fully differential. Equalization for common cable types and a black level clamp may be enabled by simple link changes.
The bandwidth of 35 MHz enables it to be used with HDTV component inputs. RollCall provides full remote control and monitoring. The monitoring facilities include identification of signal presence, format/standard and sync/burst height
REAR PANEL VIEWS
5
OUTPUTS
3
4
6
2
IQAVDR-2
7
9 10
1
8
2
LOOP IN
IQAVDR-1
OUTPUTS 4
2 3
1 LOOP IN
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.1
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
Versions of the module cards available are: IQAVDR-1 IQAVDR-2 IQAVDR-1A IQAVDR-2A
4 output video distribution amplifier with equalisation 10 output video distribution amplifier with equalisation 6 output video distribution amplifier with equalisation 10 output video distribution amplifier with equalisation
Single width module Double width module Single width module Double width module
Note that -E versions of the above cards (for use with Nokia cable type 0.6/2.8 AF FRNC) are also available.
Note that there are two styles of rear panels available. They are not interchangeable between the two styles of enclosures. However, the cards may be fitted into any style of enclosure. ‘A’ Style Enclosure
‘O’ Style Enclosures
Rear panels with the suffix A may only be fitted into the ‘A’ style enclosure shown below.
Rear panels without the suffix A may only be fitted into the ‘0’ style enclosures shown below. information
control
home
scroll
previous
power
adjust
modules
help
lock
save
display select return
setup
recall
IQ power
(Enclosure order codes IQH3A-E-0, IQH3A-E-P, IQH3A-0-0, IQH3A-0-P)
(Enclosure order codes IQH1S-RC-0, IQH1S-RCAP, IQH1U-RC-0, IQH1U-RC-AP, Kudos Plus Products)
power
OPEN
(Enclosure order codes IQH3A-S-0, IQH3A-S-P)
(Enclosure order codes IQH3N-0, IQH3N-P)
(Enclosure order codes IQH3U-RC-0, IQH3U-RCP)
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.2
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Differential Input Buffer
Video Input
Equalizer & Gain Correction
Output Drivers
Video Outputs
Sync Separation
RollCall
Processor
Features Up to 10 high quality outputs
• • • • • • • • •
Balanced Loop-through input 35 MHz bandwidth Adjustable gain and equalization Equalization for RG59U/Belden 8263 or PSF1/2/Belden 8281 (link selectable) Black level clamp (link selectable) Full RollCall remote control and signal identification Sync and burst level warnings Automatic gain control (AGC) with respect to sync height Automatic equalization (ACC) with respect to burst height
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.3
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
TECHNICAL PROFILE
Features 200 m .................................-1 dB typical at 25 MHz
Signal Inputs
300 m ................................-1 dB typical at 15 MHz Video ..................................1 Balanced loop-through
AGC ...................................[On/Off] - All recognized SD Sources
Signal Outputs Video ..................................Up to 10 Unbalanced Outputs
Card Edge Controls (also available via RollCall)
ACC ...................................[On/Off] - Composite Sources Only
Functions Available via RollCall™ Only Signal Identification ............Line Standard – NTSC, 525 Mono, PAL, 625 Mono, HD(720), HD(1080), None, Unknown
Gain....................................±3 dB in steps of 0.05 dB Equalization (PSF1/2 or Beldon 8281) 0-200 m ..............................±0.1 dB to 10 MHz ±0.2 dB 10-25 MHz
Selectable Clamp Signal level.........................Sync and Burst amplitude ±10%
0-100 m ..............................+0.5, -1.5 dB 25-35 MHz 200-300 m ..........................±0.2 dB to 10 MHz +0.3 dB, -1.5 dB 10-25 MHz
Logging ..............................Signal Level Warning, Line Standard, Burst level warning
Equalization (RG59/U or Beldon 8263) 0-300 m ..............................±0.1 dB to 8 MHz 0-100 m ..............................±0.2 dB 8-20 MHz
Specifications Frequency Response
Clamp Rejection .................8 dB typical at 50 Hz
(Without Equalization) ........10 kHz - 10 MHz ± 0.1 dB 10 MHz - 30 MHz ± 0.2 dB 35 MHz 22 k ohms Headroom...........................+6 dB Output Impedance ..............75 ohms ±1% Gain....................................Unity ±1% as supplied
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.4
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
INPUT SIGNAL
7
This is the video input to the unit via loop-through BNC connectors for 75 ohms. If only one connector is used the other connector should be fitted with a 75 Ohm terminator.
LOOP IN
OUTPUT SIGNALS
OUTPUTS
5
The IQAVDR-2 provides ten isolated outputs.
IQAVDR-2
These are the outputs of the unit via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.
3
1
4
6
2
7
9 10
2
8
LOOP IN
IQAVDR-1
The IQAVDR-1 provides four isolated outputs.
OUTPUTS 4
2 3
1
The IQAVDR-1A provides six isolated outputs.
The IQAVDR-2A provides ten isolated outputs.
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.5
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
CARD EDGE CONTROLS SW2 SW3
SW1 D3 D4 1 2 3 4
ON
D1 D2
DOWN UP SPARE
-PWR +PWR
AGC
SYNC LOSS LEVEL WARNING
ACC GAIN/EQ
Adjustment of the settings of the IQAVDR is available either via card edge controls and/or via a more comprehensive remote control system using RollCall™ The adjustments are located on the front edge of the card. LED INDICATORS
D1 D2
The left hand LED (D1) indicates that the internal +6V supply is present and the right-hand LED (D2) indicates that the -6V supply is present. Both indicators are green types.
-PWR +PWR
D3 D4
When D3 is illuminated this indicates that the unit is not receiving a video input signal.
D4 provides a warning that various levels are incorrect.
SYNC LOSS LEVEL WARNING
It will become illuminated if either or any of the following parameters are in error: AGE Automatic Gain Control is out of range EQE Automatic Equalisation is out of range SLW Sync level warning (level >10% or 10% or 10 MHz) with PSF1/2 or Belden 8281 cable (length greater than 150 m), shorting links LK3 and LK4 must be fitted.
RG59/U OR BELDEN 8263
PSF1/2 OR BELDEN 8281
PSF1/2 OR BELDEN 8281 >10 MHz & > 150 m
CABLE SELECT
CABLE EQUALISATION (EQ)
SW2 SW3
SW1 1 2 3 4
ON
Note that the equaliser links LK2, LK3 and LK4 (see LINKS above) must be set to the correct positions for the particular cable type. The controls SW2 and SW3 adjust the amount of cable equalisation (or controlled HF lift) that the unit provides. When set at minimum no lift is provided. The amount of lift or equalisation available allows 300 m of RG59/U or Belden 8263 to be equalised to 8 MHz ±0.1 dB or 300 m of PSF1/2 or Belden 8281 to 10 MHz ±0.1 dB. See specification on page 2b.4 for details of extended bandwidth performance. The equalisation characteristic has been carefully tailored to allow a standard cable to be corrected with only one control. SW2 increases the amount of equalisation and SW3 reduces the amount of equalisation. Setting the Cable Equalisation
DOWN UP
Normally the AVDR would be installed at the end of the cable to be equalised. A video sweep signal covering 0-10 MHz at standard level (1V p-p) should be supplied to the cable and the output of the AVDR viewed on a suitable oscilloscope taking care that the loop through input is correctly terminated in 75 Ohms. The GAIN should be adjusted to give a 1 V p-p level at low frequencies and the EQUALISATION control adjusted to give the flattest overall response. Alternatively a standard Sin2 Pulse and Bar video test signal at the transmit end could be used and the GAIN adjusted to give a 1 V p-p bar level at the output. The EQUALISATION control should be used to give best pulse to bar relationship and pulse shape with minimum overshoots.
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
SPARE
SYNC LOSS
AGC ACC GAIN/EQ
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.8
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
LK1 REMOTE LK1
Note that the unit will respond to both local and remote control, one system overriding the settings of the other For cards using the RollCall™ remote control system, activating SW1 will override the remote control settings. The RollCall™ control panel will then follow these settings.
REMOTE
Note that in Mainframes where RollCall™ is not available the link LK1 (Remote) located near the center of the card should be set to the OFF (unconnected) position. This ensures that when the unit is powered-up the factory default settings of parameters not available as card edge adjustments, are loaded. With the link in the ON (connected) position card will power-up with the last settings sent by the remote control panel. MENU SYSTEM
IQAVDR MENU Gain
Gain AGC Setup...
Gain
Equalisation
Equalisation ACC
Equalisation
0.0dB
000
Preset
Preset
Setup Preset_Unit Logging... Software_Version Serial_No
Serial_No Serial No xxxxxxxxx OK
Software_Version Software_Version 5.1.5 OK
Logging
IQAVDR Menu System
Input_Status
(Supervisor Level) MENU AVAILABILITY AT DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS USER LEVEL ENGINEER LEVEL
IQAVDROPS
Setup menu does not include the Logging sub-menu Setup menu does not include the Logging sub-menu
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
2b.9
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b Operation from an Active Control Panel
The card may be operated with an active control panel via the RollCall™ network. The menus available for this card are shown on the previous page and will appear in the Control display window. Note that at SUPERVISOR access level all menus are available; at USER level and ENGINEER level the setup menu does not include the Logging sub-menu. Operational details for the remote control panel will be found in SECTION 1 of the Modular System Operator's Manual. MENU DETAILS (see IQAVDR Menu System Diagram)
Main Menu
MAIN MENU (seen in the Control window)
IQAVDR MENU
The main, or top level menu allows various submenus to be selected by pressing the button adjacent to the required text line.
Gain AGC Setup...
Equalisation ACC
Note that where a menu item is followed by three dots (...) this indicates that a further sub-menu may be selected. Whenever a menu item is selected the parameters of that selection will be displayed in the Information window of the front panel. Where the selection is purely a mode selection and does not enable a sub-menu, the text will become reversed (white-onblack) indicating that the mode is active. If the mode is not available for selection the text will remain normal.
Information Window
Where:
The information Window will display data about the unit setup and the video signal.
01: IQAVDR
This is the name of the unit
Inp: OK
This shows that the receiving an input signal.
Std: PAL
This indicates that the unit is processing a PAL standard signal
ISY: 0.30V
This gives the p-p input sync pulse amplitude
IBU: 0.30V
This gives the p-p input color burst amplitude
OSY: 0.30V
This gives the p-p output sync pulse amplitude
OBU: 0.30V
This gives the p-p output color burst amplitude
An example is shown below: 01: IQAVDR Inp: OK
Std: PAL
ISY: 0.30V
IBU: 0.30V
AGE EQE SLW BLW CAL The third line alternates to 01: IQAVDR Inp: OK
Std: PAL
OSY: 0.30V
OBU: 0.30V
AGE EQE SLW BLW CAL
IQAVDROPS
21-Apr-06
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 12
unit
is
2b.10
IQAVDR
SECTION 2b
◀ Gain
◀ Logging
This selection reveals a numerical readout display for the overall gain of the unit.
If a logging device is attached to the RollCall™ network, information about various parameters will be reported to the logging device assigned in the Remote Control Interface system. The RCIF Menu System can be made available to such a device.
Gain Gain
0.0dB
Logging
Preset Input_Status
The overall range of adjustment is ±3 dB in steps of 0.05 dB. Selecting Preset returns calibrated value of 0.0 dB.
the
setting
to
the
◀ AGC The Automatic Gain Control may be switched ON (text highlighted) or OFF (text normal). Gain is automatically adjusted with respect to the sync pulse amplitude. For 525 line sources the gain is adjusted to maintain a sync amplitude of approximately 286 mV. For 625 sources the amplitude is maintained at approximately 300 mV. Note that when the AGC is ON the manual gain control is disabled. Note also that the AGC function is disabled when HD standards are detected. ◀ Setup This selection reveals a sub-menu that allows the following functions to be set up: Setup Preset_Unit Logging... Software_Version Serial_No
◀ Input _Status When activated the status of the input signal and sync and burst level warning are issued to the logging device. INPUT LOST WARNING: EQE:AGE:SLW:BLW: OK STD =NTSC 525 MONO NTSC 525 MONO PAL 625 MONO HD(720) HD(1080) NONE UNKNOWN Where: AGE
Automatic Gain Control is out of range
EQE
Automatic Equalization is out of range
SLW
Sync level warning (level >10% or 10% or 15 dB Input Return Loss: ..............> 8dB (Relay bypass version when not in BYPASS mode) Output Return Loss: ...........> 8dB (Relay bypass version when not in BYPASS mode)
Connector / Format .............BNC/75 ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Controls Indicators Power ..................................OK (Green) CPU running........................OK (Green flashing) FPGA running .....................OK (Yellow flashing) Status ..................................OK (Green) Warning (Yellow) Error (Red) Input 1 .................................OK (Green) Input 2 .................................OK (Green) SDI error..............................Error (Red) Reference lock ....................OK (Green)
Video Controls Note: The exact cable length performance will depend greatly on the quality of the cable used, the SDI video rate and the system setup. It should be noted that the specified cable lengths are a guide only.
Select primary input ............1/2/Auto with user configurable rules
Analog Reference Input ......1 x Analog Reference with passive loop-through SMPTE 240/ 274M and RS170A
Standards List .....................Select video standards for automatic follow
Electrical .............................Black (HD tri-level and SD bi-level) and Black Burst (SD bi-level) SD bi-level – RS170A HD Tr-level – SMPTE 240M, 274M and 296M
Output Standard..................Select, Follow Input, Follow Reference
Black Level..........................±200 mV in steps of 1 mV Master Video Gain ..............±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Y Gain .................................±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Cb/Cr Gain ..........................±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB.
Connector / Format .............BNC/75 ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Pattern Select......................100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars SMPTE Bars, Tartan Bars, Pluge Ramp, H Sweep, Pulse & Bar, Burst
Analog Reference Return Loss SD bi-level > 40 dB to 5.5 MHz HD tri-level > 35 dB to 30 MHz
Blank Ancillary Data ............Blank All, Blank HANC, Pass All, Pass when Output Standard equals Input Standard
Signal Outputs
VBI Line Blank.....................Individual lines for each video standard
Outputs................................x 3/x 4 HD/SD-SDI Electrical .............................1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SD-SDI, SMPTE 259MC Connector / Format .............BNC/75 ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel Return loss ..........................> 15 dB Note: It is advisable not to cascade modules using the relay rear version although in certain system setups it may be possible if the interconnecting cable lengths are kept to an absolute minimum.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Manual Freeze ....................On/Off Freeze .................................Field/Frame Video Channel Control ........Mono, Y/C blank Reference select .................External with phasing, Input Video with delay (Units: Lines and Pixels), Free-run Default Video Output...........pattern / freeze/ black / run through / redundant input Input Backup .......................Backup input switch can be made automatically based upon Video presence and standard, Video Errors and Audio presence
Page 6
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Other Controls
Specifications
GPI Configuration ...............Not Used, as an output, as an input, pulse width timer + invert
Video Standards
GPI Input .............................Activates on contact closure: Freeze, Pattern, Black, Blank ANC, Mono Y only, Mono CbCr only, Use I/P & Ext. reference, select I/P 1 & 2 & Backup, Memory recall. GPI Output ..........................Produces an output for: Input 1 & 2 OK, Reference OK Freeze, Pattern, Black, Monchrome
750(720)/60p, 1125(1080)/30i 750(720)/59p, 750(720)/50p, 1125(1080)/29i 1125(1080)/30p, 1125(1080)/29p, 1125(1080)/25i 1125(1080)/25p, 1125(1080)/24p, 1125(1080)/24sF 1125(1080)/23p, 1125(1080)/23sF 1125(1035)/30i, 1125(1035)/29i 525(480)/29i, 625(576)/25i
User Memories....................16 x Save / Recall / Rename
Minimum Delay ...................1 Line
RollCall Features
Video Delay.........................1 line to 1 frame + 1line (synchronizing) 1 line to 1 frame – 1 pixel (delay mode)
Logging ...............................Input Status ANC, EDH, CRC Errors & standard Reference Status & Standard Video output status & standard RollTrack Controls...............Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending. RollTrack Sources...............(Internal or detected device states that trigger the sending of RollTracks) - Unused, Video Delay, Input Present & Loss, Reference OK & Loss, Output Freeze & Unfreeze, GPI 1 & 2 High, Low, Inactive
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Synchronizer Hysteresis Window HD - 4 μs SD - 11 μs Reference Source ...............External – HD Tri-Level (HD output only), SD Bi-level, Input Video syncs Genlock Adjustment ............Up to ±1 frame in steps of 1 pixel
Power Consumption Module Power Consumption .. 8.6 W max
Page 7
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
IQSYN20 Connections This section describes the physical input and output connections used by the IQSYN20.
Input Connections Serial In The serial digital input is made to the unit via a BNC connector which terminates in 75 Ohms. 2
SERIAL IN
Reference Input The external sync input to the unit is made via the passive loop-through BNC connectors for 75 Ohms. It should be noted that proper operation to the full specification can only be achieved with a correctly terminated, noise-free, stable, black sync reference input. Whilst lock may be achieved with an unsuitable sync source the increased jitter evident on the SDI output will affect locking and cable length performance at the receiving equipment. Note:
If the loop-through facility is not used the unused BNC socket must be fitted with a 75 Ohm terminator.
IQSYN2 _27-2A
Output Connections Serial Digital Video Outputs These are the Serial Digital outputs of the unit via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 8
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
GPI (2A Version) There are the two GPI connections via BNC connectors that may be configured as inputs or outputs.
GPI (1A version) There is one GPI connection via a BNC connector that may configured as an input or output.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 9
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Card Edge Indicators
The LEDs on the edge of the IQSYN20 indicate the operating status of the module. + Power OK Indicates that a positive power supply is present. - Power OK
Indicates that a negative power supply is present.
CPU OK FPGA Done (Yellow)
This LED flashes when the CPU is running. Flashes when the FPGA is running. When the unit is booting, this LED is illuminated, until the SDI is enabled.
IN 1, IN 2 (Green)
These LEDs indicate which input has been selected.
SDI Error (Red)
This will become illuminated if any CRC, EDH or TRS errors are detected on the selected SDI input or a loss of SDI.
Ref Lock (Green)
This LED will be illuminated when genlock is enabled and locked.
Error (Red)
This LED indicates board fault conditions. These include: Serializer lock fault. Output serialiser fails to lock. SDI JTAG board fault. Internal JTAG interface is inadvertently enabled. In all cases continuous illumination indicates a board fault and a service is required. Perform a Factory Reset and supply a valid SDI video source before calling service. When the unit is booting, this LED is illuminated, until the SDI is enabled.
Warning (Yellow)
This indicates operational errors. These include: Input Video - Incompatible input standard. Detected input standard is invalid. Input Video - SDI problem. CRC or other SDI errors detected on selected input in the last whole field. Reference - Lock Failure. Genlock failed to lock to selected source. Will generally light up in transitional states like standard changes, but continuous illumination indicates a problem. More information is available in the status window.
OK (Green) IQSYN20
Indicates that the module is operating correctly. 27/04/2010
Page 10
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Controlling the IQSYN20 from the RollCall Control Panel The Information Window The information window appears in the upper-right corner of each screen and displays basic information about the audio and video status of the unit.
Select either Video Status or Audio Status to display the corresponding information. The following Video Status information is displayed: Line One Displays the status of the video input, followed by the standard of the input, or last valid signal. The unit is receiving a valid input signal of a recognized INP:OK standard. The unit is not receiving an input signal. INP:LOST The unit is receiving an input signal, but the signal is not INP:FAIL valid. For example, the frame rate differs between the input and output standards. The unit is receiving a valid input signal, but in a different INP: MISM format to the selected output standard. For example, in 1080/29i, out 1080/29p. Line Two Displays the operating standard of the unit. The input signal standard is not recognized. OUT: Unknown The operating standard. OUT: 1080/29i (For example) Line Three Displays the status of genlock, followed by the standard of the analog reference signal when in Free-Run or Lock to Reference mode. Free run, with no reference connected. Ref: Free Free run. REF: OK F 1080/29i Valid reference and unit genlocked. REF: LOCK 1080/29i Valid reference but ambiguous field type. REF: LK-F No reference signal found. REF: LOST Genlock not possible. REF: FAIL Failed to genlock to input. REF: FAIL INP Genlocked to input video. REF: LOCK INP
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 11
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Line Four Displays the status of the ancillary data and the output picture. Ancillary present. ANC Output frozen. FRZ Output pattern. PAT Monochrome. MON Horizontal ancillary data is being blanked. HBL Output black. BLK When Audio Status is selected, the status of the embedded audio input is displayed where: p D
IQSYN20
Indicates that the channel is a PCM audio input. Indicates that no audio input is detected Indicates that the signal is data (non-pcm, Dolby, etc…)
27/04/2010
Page 12
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Video Input Use the settings on the Video Input screen to: •
Select the input source.
•
Enable any specified backup rules.
•
Specify the condition that must exist in order for the unit to consider input to have been lost.
•
Specify valid input standards.
•
View information about CRC/EDH errors.
Input Select This allows either input 1 or Input 2 to be selected for processing. This control is also present on the Input Backup screen.
Backup Enable When selected, if a backup rule is triggered, the action defined in the backup rules takes place. This control is also present on the Input Backup screen.
Input Loss If The module can take automatic action if the input signal is lost. This control defines what is considered to be a loss of input and so what will cause the automatic actions to be triggered. •
No Input: If there is no input signal of any type this will be considered to be a loss of input.
•
In/Out std. Mismatch: If the standard of the input signal does not match the output standard this will be considered to be a loss of input.
Agile V-Lock This function is intended to permit correct reception of upstream switched misaligned 625/25i and 525/29i sources without picture disturbance. In HD standards, a mechanism is in place to IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 13
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6 re-synchronize after a switch, which makes this mode unnecessary. A tolerance of +/- 5 lines misalignment between sources is permissible which is wider than the 5 µs allowance specified in SMPTE RP-168, and it is assumed that the correct switch point with respect to the source is used. Notes:
Due to the time required to recognize a change in picture framing in standard definition (SD) there must be a minimum delay of 4 lines so that no displaced picture is seen at the output during a misaligned switch. This may be assured in a synchronizing mode (external reference or free-run) by setting the Frames delay value to at least 1. Application areas that require agility over delay will suit this function better. Poor and unstable signals may benefit from having this function disabled. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Correct operation of agile V-lock requires a correct vertical reference point. On some legacy equipment from before 1995 the end of vertical blanking was on the permissible lines 10-19 as well as on the current line 20. This practice is no longer permitted, and will prevent correct vertical alignment of non-compliant legacy 525/59i sources. If this is the case then disable Agile VLock.
Valid Input Standards To specify the video input standards that the unit will accept, select the corresponding check boxes. To select all check boxes, click Set All. To clear all check boxes, click Clear All. Note:
If any other standards are detected, an invalid standard will be assumed and this will force an input video loss with the FAIL status.
CRC/EDH Errors This item provides information about the Cyclic Redundancy Checksum errors (CRC) and Error Detection Handling (EDH). •
CRC/EDH Errors: This displays the total CRC or EDM Full Frame error count since the last reset.
•
Time Since Last (CRC/EDH) Error: This will show the time in 5 second intervals up to 1 minute then in minute intervals, since the last error was detected.
•
ANC Errors: This will display the total number of ANC errors since the last reset. All ancillary packets are checked. Hence, a problem video source or dropout can produce a large number of errors.
•
Time Since Last (ANC) Error: This will show the time in 5 second intervals up to 1 minute then in minute intervals, since the last error was detected.
•
Reset Counts: This will reset the error counters to zero.
•
Time Since Reset: This will show the time in 5 second intervals up to 1 minute then in minute intervals, since the counters were last reset. Note:
IQSYN20
If the selected input changes, the CRC/EDH counts will be automatically reset once the software has decided that the input is correctly locked.
27/04/2010
Page 14
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Input Backup The IQSYN20 can be configured to detect if the input signal on Master (Inp 1) fails and automatically switch to the Backup (Inp 2) signal.
Enable Backup Input Switch Select this option to enable the input backup switch functions. This control is also present on the Video Input screen.
Priority / Reversion These settings apply to the Carrier Detect Fail controls and specify the input that will be given priority and the time that a lost signal must have been regained before the system will revert to the input that has priority.
IQSYN20
•
None: Neither Input 1 nor Input 2 has priority. If a signal is lost, causing the module to switch to the other input, when the signal is regained, the module will not revert to the original input.
•
Master (Inp 1) Priority: Input 1 has priority. Normally, the module will use the Input 1 signal. If the signal on Input 1 is lost, the module will switch to Input 2. If the signal on Input 1 is subsequently recovered, the module will revert to using Input 1 after the time specified as the Reversion Delay has elapsed.
•
Backup (Inp 2) Priority: Input 2 has priority. Normally, the module will use the Input 2 signal. If the signal on Input 2 is lost, the module will switch to Input 1. If the signal on Input 2 is subsequently recovered, the module will revert to using Input 2 after the time specified as the Reversion Delay has elapsed.
27/04/2010
Page 15
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6 •
Reversion Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the time that must elapse before the priority input will revert to a recovered signal. The range of adjustment is 0 – 100 seconds and the preset value is 0s. Note:
If the signal fails on both Input 1 and Input 2, the unit will switch to the priority input. If any of the Backup (Inp 2) Select controls are enabled, the Priority/Reversion controls will not be available.
Backup State Select This reflects the overall status of the Backup (Inp 2) Select controls, which are: •
Master (Inp 1) Carrier Detect Fail
•
Master (Inp 1) Invalid Standard
•
Master (Inp 1) Error
•
Master (Inp 1) Embedded Audio Fail
If none of these options are enabled, Backup State Select will display None. If all of the enabled options have a status of False, Backup State Select will display False. If one or more (but not necessarily all) of the enabled options have a status of True, Backup Select State will display True.
Master State Select This reflects the status of the Backup (Inp 2) Carrier Detect Fail control. If the Backup (Inp 2) Carrier Detect Fail control is not enabled, Master State Select will display None. If the Backup (Inp 2) Carrier Detect Fail control is enabled, Master State Select will display the control’s status – either True or False.
Input Select Use the radio buttons to manually select either Input 1 or Input 2. This control is also present on the Video Input screen. Changes made to the control on either screen will be reflected on the other.
Master (Inp 1) Carrier Detect Fail When this option is enabled, Backup (Inp 2) will be selected if the signal on Master (Inp 1) is lost and is missing for more than the time specified by the Delay control. •
Enable: Select the check box to enable this option.
•
Status: This displays the carrier status. It will show True in the event of failure, otherwise it will show False.
•
Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the amount of time that must elapse before a change of status is reported. The range of adjustment is from 0.5s to 10.0s. The preset value is 0.5s.
Master (Inp 1) Invalid Standard When this option is enabled, Backup (Inp 2) will be selected if an invalid standard, as specified on the Video Input screen, is detected on Master (Inp 1) and remains for the time specified by the Delay control.
IQSYN20
•
Enable: Select the check box to enable this option.
•
Status: This displays the Invalid Standard status. It will show True if an invalid standard is detected, otherwise it will show False.
•
Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the amount of time that must elapse before a change of status is reported. The range of adjustment is from 1s to 5s. The preset value is 1s. 27/04/2010
Page 16
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Master (Inp 1) Error When this option is enabled, Backup (Inp 2) will be selected if the signal on Master (Inp 1) is in error and in error for more than the time specified by the Delay control. •
Enable: Select the check box to enable this option.
•
Status: This displays the input error status. It will show True if an error is present, otherwise it will show False.
•
Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the amount of time that must elapse before a change of status is reported. The range of adjustment is from 1s to 5s. The preset value is 1s.
Master (Inp 1) Embedded Audio Fail When this option is enabled, Backup (Inp 2) will be selected if any of the audio groups specified by the Required Emb Groups/Pairs On Input 1 control fail for more than the time specified by the Delay control. •
Enable: Select the check box to enable this option.
•
Status: This displays the audio status for audio that has been specified as required. It will show True for audio fail, otherwise it will show False.
•
Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the amount of time that must elapse before a change of status is reported. The range of adjustment is from 1s to 10s. The preset value is 1s.
•
Required Emb Groups/Pairs On Input 1: Select the check boxes for all audio groups/pairs that are required in order for the input to be considered acceptable. If any selected audio group/pair fails for more than the time specified by the Delay control, the input will switch to Backup (Inp 2). If audio fails on a group/pair that is not marked as required, the input will be considered acceptable and no switch will occur. Sel All: Selects all of the Required Emb Groups/Pairs On Input 1 check boxes. Sel None: Clears all of the Required Emb Groups/Pairs On Input 1 check boxes. Lock Grp: Selecting this option locks groups together. Selecting one channel in the group will automatically select the other. Clearing one channel in the group will automatically clear the other.
Backup (Inp 2) Carrier Detect Fail When this option is enabled, Master (Inp 1) will be selected if the signal on Backup (Inp 2) is lost and is missing for more than the time specified by the Delay control.
IQSYN20
•
Enable: Select the check box to enable this option.
•
Status: This displays the carrier status. It will show True in the event of failure, otherwise it will show False.
•
Delay: Use the slider bar to specify the amount of time that must elapse before a change of status is reported. The range of adjustment is from 0.5s to 10.0s. The preset value is 0.5s.
27/04/2010
Page 17
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Video Output Use the settings on the Video Output screen to: •
Specify the video output standard.
•
Set up the test pattern, if any, to be generated.
•
Specify the default output to be generated in response to a loss of input.
•
Adjust the signal gain and black levels.
•
Control the unit’s monochrome functions.
•
Control the unit’s picture freeze function.
Note that for this and other screens the following applies to the scroll bars: The and discrete steps.
symbols at the ends of the scroll bar allow the value to be adjusted in
The numerical value will be shown next to the scroll bars and selecting Preset the setting to the calibrated value for that item.
Output Select the output standard from the following list: 1125(1080)/30i
1125(1080)/24p
1125(1080)/24sf
1125(1080)/25p
1125(1080)/29p
1125(1035)/30i
1125(1035)/29i
1125(1080)/23p
1125(1080)/23sf
750(720)/50p
525(480)/29i
750(720)/60p
750(720)/59p
1125(1080)/25i
1125(1080)/29i
625(576)/25i
1125(1080)/30p
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 18
will return
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Output Standard This function defines how the output standard is selected. •
Manual Selection: When checked the output standard will be the one selected via the Output/Output Standard list.
•
Follows Input: When checked the output standard will be set to be the same as the input standard.
•
Follows Reference: When checked the output standard will be set to be the same as the reference input standard. Note:
If you have selected Follows Input or Follows Reference, you can pre-select the output standard for use with the Manual Selection option. If you then select Manual Selection, the specified standard is used.
Pattern This allows the pattern functions to be set up. •
Enable: When checked, the output will become the pattern selected from the Pattern Type list.
•
H-Scroll: When checked, the selected pattern will scroll from left to right at a fixed rate. This mode is useful for differentiating between an input test pattern signal that has become a frozen picture (caused by a loss of input signal) and a test pattern that has been chosen to be the output.
Pattern Type This allows a pattern to be selected from the list. This pattern will become the output signal when Pattern/Enable is checked. Options are as follows: 100% Color Bars Sweep Tartan Bars Black
Ramp SMPTE Bars Burst
75% Color Bars Pulse & Bar Pluge
Default Output This controls the units' response to a loss of input signal as set via the Video Input/Input Loss if and Valid Input Standards functions. Options are: •
Freeze Frame: When checked the output will become a frozen frame picture.
•
Freeze Field: When checked the output will become a frozen field picture.
•
Black: When checked the output picture will cut to black.
•
Input: When checked the incoming signal will be displayed whenever possible.
•
Out Pattern: When checked the output picture will become the pattern selected via the Output/Pattern Type function.
ProcAmp This function allows the gain and black level of the signal to be adjusted. •
Master Gain: This allows the overall gain (Y and Cb/Cr) to be adjusted over a range of ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Preset value is 0.0 dB.
Y and C gain may be independently adjusted with the controls described below. IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 19
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6 •
Y Gain: This allows the Y (luminance) gain to be adjusted by ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Preset value is 0 dB.
•
C Gain: This allows the Cb/Cr (color difference) gain to be adjusted by ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Preset value is 0 dB. Note:
•
The total range of both Master + Y and Master + C controls is +6 dB to -10 dB.
Black Level: This allows the black level to be adjusted by ±200 mV in steps of 1 mV. Preset value is 0.
Utilities The Monochrome settings control the unit’s monochrome output functions. •
Enable: When checked, the monochrome functions will be enabled.
•
Monochrome Type Y Only: When selected, the output picture will become monochrome using only the Y component of the signal. C Only: When selected, the output picture will become monochrome using only the CbCr components of the signal.
The Freeze settings control the picture freeze function.
IQSYN20
•
Force Freeze: When checked the output will become a frozen picture.
•
Freeze Type: The frozen picture may be chosen to be either a frozen Frame or a frozen Field.
27/04/2010
Page 20
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Video Delay/Genlock As a frame-based video synchronizer with up to 1 frame of storage, there are many possibilities for timing the output video. Each has an impact on delay through the unit and the possible level of control. Of these there are two classes of operation – Referenced modes and Delay Modes.
Referenced modes In a referenced mode, video output is independently timed from the input, so that the output is always aligned to the reference raster to match other equipment for switching and processing purposes. This is the normal frame synchronizer operating mode, in which it will always have a good whole frame of video to display (whether live, frozen, black or test pattern). As well, due to the independence of the output timing, it will be able to "firewall" the video. For more information, see the Firewall section on page 71. The delay through the unit remains within the one-frame operating range of the buffer, but cannot be directly controlled since it is externally defined by the output and input references. However, phasing relative to any external output reference is adjustable.
Delay modes (Lock to Input) Delay modes use the input reference to determine the output reference. These are not synchronizing modes, but are utility delay generation mode which may be useful when the audio processing or a simple delay is required. The output will be stable only if the input is stable so it is not a viable firewall mode The total delay is summed from calculated and measured delays to a resolution of one video line, and shown in the Internal Delay box. This is then available for use in the tracking Audio Delays.
Genlock The Genlock function enables you to specify the Genlock or Video Delay mode, which defines the source of timing for the output video.
Free Run This is a special case of referenced type mode. When selected, the unit's output will not be locked to any input signal. Instead, it will run nominally at the correct frame rate and
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 21
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6 synchronize input video to this. Its most likely use is to stabilize and firewall poor sources in the absence of a station reference. This is the Factory Defaults preset.
Lock to Reference This is the normal referenced mode. When selected, the unit will lock to an external black (burst) reference signal, either bi-level SD or tri-level HD. Horizontal or Vertical Timing adjustments are possible for correctly phasing to match other sources. Its most likely use is to stabilize, firewall and correctly phase (synchronize) incoming line or post-router switched sources to a station reference. This reference should be correctly terminated and clean of noise and jitter to give the best possible results. A bi-level reference of the correct frame rate is always acceptable, but a trilevel HD reference is only acceptable for a HD output. There are many cross-locking modes possible, and for this purpose the correct frame rate is either the output frame rate or double or half the rate - when an interlaced output is referenced to a progressive source the field relationship is unknown and this is indicated with REF: LK-F in the status window. When an unsuitable reference is given the unit will fail to lock and REF: FAIL will show in the video status window. In this mode, Reference Status displays the amplitude of the reference sync signal, either peak for bi-level (typically 300 mV) or peak-peak for tri-level (typically 600 mV). Note that unterminated tri-level syncs will have the indication clipped to around 1 Volt.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 22
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Input – Manual H and V This allows the adjustment of the delay by changing the vertical and horizontal timing. When a delay is required to be defined in terms of video lines, maybe to round up to the next frame boundary, this mode can be used. However, it may introduce complications on changes of video standard, and the minimum delay can go below the 0.75 ms audio minimum delay that would permit delay matching.
Vertical Timing Vertical Timing allows the video delay to be adjusted in steps of one line. The range of adjustment is one line short of an output frame in either direction. The preset value is 0 lines.
Horizontal Timing Horizontal Timing allows the video delay to be adjusted in steps of one line. The range of adjustment is one pixel short of an output line in either direction. The preset value is 0 pixels. The total delay is the sum of Vertical Timing + Horizontal timing. An overall effect is to allow a delay of 1 frame - 5 lines, for example, to align an earlier 5-line delay device to the next frame boundary. The sum of horizontal and vertical timing is post-limited to be under +/- a frame of the current standard. There is also a forced minimum delay of 1 line.
Internal Delay This displays the value of the current delay in milliseconds. This is useful to check that a suitable delay has been set. Notes:
• •
IQSYN20
When the delay is set below the minimum possible, this control will limit at 1 video line. When the delay is set above the maximum possible, this control will limit at just below 1 video frame.
27/04/2010
Page 23
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
HANC & VBI Blank(ing)
VBI for Standard This item allows the Vertical Interval data (all or specific lines) contained in the input signal to be blanked or passed through the module. It allows the selection of which vertical interval lines to pass through to the output and which lines to blank. Standards that may be selected are as follows: 1125(1080)/30i 1125(1035)/30i 1125(1080)/30p 1125(1035)/29i 1125(1080)/29i 750(720)/60p 1125(1080)/29p 750(720)/59p 1125(1080)/25i 750(720)/50p 1125(1080)/25p 525(480)/29i 1125(1080)/24p 625(576)/25i 1125(1080)/24sf 1125(1080)/23p 1125(1080)/23sf In the example shown, the 1125(1080)29i standard has been selected and VBI lines 8 to 20 and 571 to 583 are displayed. Different standards will display different VBI lines.
Blank Lines To prevent specific lines from being passed to the output signal, select them from the Blank Lines section. To allow all displayed vertical interval lines to be passed to the output signal, click Pass All Lines. To prevent all displayed vertical interval lines from being passed to the output signal, click Blank All Lines.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 24
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Input Ancillary The Input Ancillary controls enable you to specify whether to: •
Remove all ancillary data.
•
Remove only horizontal ancillary data.
•
Allow ancillary data to pass unaltered
•
Remove all ancillary data, if input signal fails to match the output standard.
To remove all ancillary data, select Blank All. This overrides the VBI Blank Lines control. To remove horizontal ancillary data (HANC), select Blank HANC. To allow ancillary data to pass unaltered, select Pass. When Pass is selected, pass-through operations will not alter audio packets for groups that the IQSYN20 has not selected for embedding. To remove all ancillary data, if the input signal fails to match the output standard, select Blank All on STD mismatch.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 25
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
GPIO (General Purpose Input Output) This screen allows the GPI functions to be configured. Note:
GPI/O 2 is only valid for the double width module.
GPI/O 1 and GPI/O 2 This allows GPI to be configured in the following ways: Unused: GPI is inactive. Input: GPI is configured as an input. Output: GPI is configured as an output.
GPI 1 (Input) or GPI 2 (Input) When the GPI is configured as an input, this item allows an action to be chosen that will occur when the GPI input is grounded or, if the Invert function is selected, becomes open. The options are as follows: Unused This allows a direct GPI to RollTrack without calling the other states. Freeze The output picture will be frozen. When released (input open) the output picture will be unfrozen. Pattern The output picture will become the selected pattern. When released (input open) the output picture will revert to normal. Black The output picture will cut to black. When released (input open) the output picture will revert to normal. Blank Ancillary Ancillary data will be blanked. When released (input open) ancillary data will be passed. MonoChrm Y Only The output picture will become monochrome using only the Y component of the signal. When released (input open) the picture will revert to normal color. IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 26
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6 MonoChrm CbCr Only The output picture will become monochrome using only the CbCr components of the signal. When released (input open) the picture will revert to normal color. Use I/P Ref (SDI) The unit will lock to the video input. When released (input open) the unit will revert to the Free Run mode. Use Ext Ref (Analog) The unit will lock to the reference signal. When released (input open) the unit will revert to the Free Run mode. Select Inp 1, Select Inp 2 Input 1 or Input 2 will be selected. Select Input This is a toggle function that selecting between Input 1 and Input 2. Select Backup This will enable the Backup Rules function. When released, the Backup Rules function will be disabled. Memory 1 to 16 The unit will revert to the setup stored in the selected memory location. When released (input open) this state will remain; i.e. it will not revert to the previous state.
GPI Input Edge Switching Operation With the exception of Memory Recalls 1-16, the GPI input will switch on both edges, hence the switch to the inactive state will perform the reverse function. This may override any other control operations performed while the GPI was active.
GPI 1 (Output) and GPI 2 (Output) When the GPI is configured as an output, this item allows an action to be chosen that will produce an output signal at the GPI connector. The GPI output will be driven to ground or, if the Invert function is selected, becomes open. The options are as follows: Input 1 (or 2) OK An output signal will be produced if the HD SDI input is present and OK. Reference OK An output signal will be produced if the reference signal is present and OK. Freeze An output signal will be produced when freeze is selected. Pattern An output signal will be produced when patterns are enabled. Black An output signal will be produced if the picture has become cut to black. Monochrome An output signal will be produced if the picture has become a monochrome picture.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 27
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
GPI Interface Circuitry
GPIO
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 28
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Memory The Memory function allows you to save up to 16 configurations, which can be recalled later. You can rename the 16 memory locations to provide more meaningful descriptions. You cannot store more than 16 configurations in memory.
Save Memory The save memory function allows you to store up to 16 configurations. To save the settings, in the Save Memory area, select a memory location and click Save. The module’s current settings are saved. To clear a memory location, in the Save Memory area, select a memory location and click Clear. The settings stored for that memory location are cleared. After you clear a memory location, it disappears from the Recall Memory list. To change a memory name, in the Save Memory Name field, type the new name (the return symbol changes to red ), and then click to save the new name. The symbol will then become black again. Selecting Preset will return the text to the default name.
Recall Memory The recall memory function enables you to recall previously saved configurations from memory. The Recall Memory list is empty until you Save a Memory. To recall memory settings, in the Recall Memory area, select a memory location. The new settings are applied and the memory name appears in the Last Recalled Memory function area.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 29
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
RollTrack This function allows information to be sent, via the RollCall™ network, to other compatible units connected on the same network.
Disable All When this item is checked all RollTrack items will be disabled.
Index This item allows up to 16 RollTrack outputs to be setup.
Source This allows the source of information that triggers the transmission of data to be selected. The options are: Unused Video Delay Input Present Input Loss Reference OK Reference Lost O/p Freeze O/p UnFreeze GPI1High GPI1Low INP1 Select Out 1125(1080)/30p Out 1125(1080)/29p Out 1125(1080)/25p Out 1125(1080)/24sf Out 1125(1035)/30i Out 750(720)/59p
GPI1InActive GPI2High GPI2Low GPI2InActive De-embed 1 PCM / Data De-embed 1 Lost De-embed 2 PCM / Data De-embed 2 Lost De-embed 3 PCM / Data De-embed 3 Lost INP2 Select Out 1125(1080)/23p Out 1125(1035)/29i Out 750(720)/50p Out 1125(1080)/30i Out 1125(1080)/29i
De-embed 4 PCM / Data De-embed 4 Lost De-embed 5 PCM / Data De-embed 5 Lost De-embed 6 PCM / Data De-embed 6 Lost De-embed 7 PCM / Data De-embed 7 Lost De-embed 8 PCM / Data De-embed 8 Lost Out 1125(1080)/25i Out 1125(1080)/24p Out 1125(1080)/23sf Out 750(720)/60p Out 525(480)/29i Out 625(576)/25i
For more information, refer to RollTrack Source Descriptions on page 74.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 30
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Address This item allows the address of the selected destination unit to be set. To change the address, type the new destination in the text area and then select (return) (Preset) returns to the default destination The full RollTrack address has four sets of numbers, for example, 0000:10:01*99. •
The first set (0000) is the network segment code number.
•
The second set (10) is the number identifying the (enclosure/mainframe) unit.
•
The third set (01) is the slot number in the unit
•
The fourth set (99) is a user settable number that is a unique identification number for the destination unit in a multi-unit system. This ensures that only the correct unit will respond to the command. If left at 00 an incorrectly fitted unit may respond inappropriately.
Command The full RollTrack command has two sets of numbers, for example: 84:156. •
The first set (84) is the RollTrack command number.
•
The second set (156) is the value sent with the RollTrack command number.
For details of RollCall command values please refer to page 52.
RollTrack Sending This item shows when the unit is actively sending the RollTrack command. String Number No Yes Internal Type Error
A string value is always being sent. A number value is always being sent. The message is not being sent. The message is being sent. Inconsistent behavior; please contact your local Snell & Wilcox agent.
RollTrack Status This item will show the status of the currently selected RollTrack index. OK Unknown Timeout Bad Disabled
IQSYN20
RollTrack message sent and received OK. RollTrack message has been sent but it has not yet completed. RollTrack message sent but acknowledgement not received. This could be because the destination unit is not at the location specified. RollTrack message has not been correctly acknowledged at the destination unit. This could be because the destination unit is not of the type specified. RollTrack sending is disabled.
27/04/2010
Page 31
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Logging Information about various parameters can be made available to a logging device that is attached to the Rollcall network.
Logging Control This allows an item to be selected for logging and the characteristics displayed.
Log Enable The item to be logged is selected by checking the appropriate box. Any of the items may be selected from the list.
Log Field This shows the logging field name.
Log Value This will show the logging field value or the status of the item.
Video Input Logging This allows the status of the Video inputs to be logged.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 32
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
In1 Aud(io) State Logging This allows the state of embedded audio on input 1 to be logged.
In1 Aud(io) Type Logging This allows the type of audio signal embedded on audio input 1 to be logged.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 33
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
In2 Aud(io) State Logging This allows the state of embedded audio on input 2 to be logged.
In2 Aud(io) Type Logging This allows the type of audio signal embedded on input 2 to be logged.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 34
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Ref/Output Logging This allows the status of the video output and the reference signal to be logged.
Misc Logging This allows the following information to be logged:
IQSYN20
•
OS Version
•
Build Number
•
Hardware Version
•
Firmware Version
•
Up Time
27/04/2010
Page 35
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
RollCall log Fields Log Field INPUT_1_TYPE
IQSYN20
Log Value HD / SD SDI
INPUT_1_STATE
FAIL:Lost, OK, FAIL:Error
INPUT_1_STANDARD
INPUT_1_SDI_ERRS
OK, WARN
INPUT_1_SDI_ERRSEC
NUM
INPUT_1_SDI_ANC_ERRS
OK, WARN
INPUT_1_SDI_ANC_ERRSECS
NUM
OUTPUT_1_STATE
OK
OUTPUT_1_TYPE
HD / SD SDI
OUTPUT_1_STANDARD
OUTPUT_1_SOURCE
REFERENCE_SOURCE
REFERENCE_TYPE
REFERENCE_STATE
FAIL:Lost, FAIL:Error, OK
REFERENCE_STANDARD
INPUT_1_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_1_STATE to INPUT_1_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_8_STATE
FAIL:Lost, OK, WARN:Off, LOST, UNKNOWN
INPUT_1_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_1_TYPE to INPUT_1_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_8_TYPE
PCM, NONPCM, WARN:No Input, UNKNOWN
INPUT_2_TYPE
HD / SD SDI
INPUT_2_STATE
FAIL:Lost, OK, FAIL:Error
INPUT_2_STANDARD
INPUT_2_SDI_ERRS
OK, WARN
INPUT_2_SDI_ERRSEC
NUM
INPUT_2_SDI_ANC_ERRS
OK, WARN
INPUT_2_SDI_ANC_ERRSECS
NUM
INPUT_2_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_2_STATE to INPUT_2_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_8_STATE
FAIL:Lost, OK, WARN:Off, UNKNOWN, LOST
INPUT_2_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_2_TYPE to INPUT_2_EMBEDDED_AUDIO_8_TYPE
PCM, NONPCM, UNKNOWN
SN
OS_VERSION
BUILD_NUMBER
HARDWARE_VERSION
FIRMWARE_VERSION
UPTIME
27/04/2010
Page 36
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Setup This screen provides basic information about the module.
Product This will show the name of the module.
Software version This item shows the version of software installed in the module.
Serial This item shows the serial number of the module
Build This will indicate the factory build number of the software installed and is for identification purposes.
Firmware This shows the version of firmware installed.
KOS This shows the version of the KOS operating system that is installed.
PCB This shows the PCB revision number.
Default Settings This set all adjustments to their default settings, leaving user memories intact.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 37
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Factory Defaults Selecting this item sets all adjustment functions that include a preset facility, to their factory default values.
Restart This will reboot the unit simulating a power-down power-up cycle restoring power-up settings.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 38
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Operation from an Active Control Panel The card can be operated from an active control panel via the RollCall network.
All operational parameters and selections are made using a system of menus displayed in two LCD windows. These menus duplicate the functions that are available via the RollCall control panel screens. Operational details for the remote control panel can be found in the Modular System Operator's Manual. The Information window has four lines of text indicating the current state of the unit.
03:IQSYN20 INP: OK Out:1080/29i REF: LOCK 525/29i ANC
The Control window displays all Selection Menus and sub-menus. Selections are made by pressing the button adjacent to the required item.
◀ Input
Output ▶
◀ Audio
Genlock ▶
◀ Utils
◀ Memories
GPI ▶
RollCall ▶
The main or top level menu allows various sub-menus to be selected by pressing the button adjacent to the required text line. Note that where a menu item is followed by three dots (...) this indicates that a further sub-menu may be selected. Whenever a menu item is selected the parameters of that selection will be displayed in the Information window of the front panel. Where the selection is purely a mode selection and does not enable a sub-menu, the text will become reversed (white-on-black) indicating that the mode is active. If the mode is not available for selection the text will remain normal. al.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 39
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
These menus duplicate the functions that are available via the RollCall control panel screens. For details of the menu functions please refer to the corresponding functions in the RollCall control panel screens section.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 40
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking RollTrack is a feature of RollCall™ (Snell & Wilcox’s proprietary remote control system), that allows devices to communicate across the RollCall network with no direct user intervention. RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking enables Snell & Wilcox RollCall™ compatible audio delay products to track delay introduced by RollCall™ compatible video processing products. The current products that implement RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking are: Audio Delay Modules IQBAAD IQBADC IQBDAC IQBDAD IQBSYN IQBADCD
Video Modules IQD1FSY IQDMSDS IQDAFS IQDMSDS IQDMSDP IQDSYN
Other Products ALCHEMIST CPP100 CPP200 NRS500 HD5050
MDD3000 MDD550 MDD560 MDD570 MDD2000
The simplest configuration is a single video unit and a single audio delay in a RollCall™ system. The audio delay will have the same delay as through the video path. If the delay changes the audio delay will track.
delayed video by 10 ms
IQD1FSY
4:2:2
RollCall connection
Analogue Audio
delayed audio by 10 ms
IQBADC
The next level of configuration is where there are multiple Frame Synchronizers (for example) each connected through RollCall™ to their own tracking Audio Delay. (It is worth stating that the synchronizers and audio delays do not have to be in the same enclosure; the addressing scheme, discussed later, allows for the units to be positioned anywhere in the RollCall™ domain.) The maximum number of video units and audio delays in a RollCall™ system is set by the maximum limit of the number of modules in a RollCall™ network and is currently 3840 on a single network without bridges. The unique identification of the destination unit (a decimal number) for various modules is as follows: Module IQBADC IQBDAC IQBAAD IQBDAD IQBSYN IQBADCD IQSYN20
ID 51 52 53 54 89 107 27/04/2010
Page 65
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
The next level of complexity is a vertical delay cluster where a video unit can have up to eight audio delays tracking - of the same or different types.
delayed video by 10 ms changes to 20 ms
IQD1FSY
4:2:2
RollCall network connection
Analogue Audio
Analogue Audio
delayed audio by 10 ms tracks to 20 ms
IQBADC
delayed audio by 10 ms tracks to 20 ms
IQBAAD
From one to eight audio delay products can be connected via RollCall™ to a single frame synchronizer, for example. If the synchronizer delay changes, then however many audio delays are connected will track the delay. The audio delays can also have a manual delay which will be added to the RollTrack delay. The next level of complexity is a horizontal delay cluster where an audio delay can track up to four video units.
IQDMSDA Δ1
IQD1FSY Δ2
IQD1FSY Δ3
IQD1FSY Δ4
RollCall network connection
IQBADC
Δm (= manual delay set in the BADC) Total delay:
ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 66
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
The total delay time through the audio delay is then the sum of the individual delays introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit. The manual delay can be set to compensate for any fixed propagation delay in the video path or may be set to zero. The next level of complexity is a matrix delay cluster where each audio delay (up to eight) can track up to four video units. This configuration is in effect a four by eight matrix of video units and audio delay units. The total delay time through the audio delay units is then the sum of the individual delays introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit.
IQDMSDA Δ1
IQD1FSY Δ2
IQD1FSY Δ3
IQD1FSY Δ4
RollCall network i
IQBDAD 1 ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
IQBDAD 8 ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm As any of the delay times change in the video path so will the audio delay time track this delay. A virtual connection is made between from, say, an IQD1FSY to an IQBDAD by: selecting the Setup... Menu of the IQD1FSY then selecting the Audio_Delay... Menu then choosing from Unit_1 to Unit_8 then entering the unique network address of the IQBDAD in the form nnnn:xx:yy*z*d where nnnn = network address and in most cases will be 0000(hex); xx = IQ enclosure address (hex); yy = slot address of the IQBDAD (hex) z = the connection (or channel) number (decimal) - see table below. d = the unique identification of the destination unit (decimal) The ID entered must match the receiving units own ID or else the command will be ignored. If the ID value is set to 00, the receiving unit does not perform an ID match and will always accept the incoming command then selecting the Delay... Menu of the IQBDAD then selecting RollTrack
Audio delay 1 Audio delay 2 Audio delay 3 Audio delay 4 IQSYN20
Example of Network Addresses with Channel Numbers and ID Numbers D1FSY 1 D1FSY 2 D1FSY 3 D1FSY 4 0000:10:01*14*54 0000:10:01*16*54 0000:10:01*17*54 0000:10:01*15*54 0000:10:03*14*54 0000:10:05*14*54 0000:10:07*14*54
0000:10:03*15*54 0000:10:05*15*54 0000:10:07*15*54 27/04/2010
0000:10:03*16*54 0000:10:05*16*54 0000:10:07*16*54
0000:10:03*17*54 0000:10:05*17*54 0000:10:07*17*54 Page 67
IQSYN20
Audio delay 5 Audio delay 6 Audio delay 7 Audio delay 8
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
0000:10:09*14*54 0000:10:0B*14*54 0000:10:0D*14*54 0000:10:0F*14*54
0000:10:09*15*54 0000:10:0B*15*54 0000:10:0D*15*54 0000:10:0F*15*54
27/04/2010
0000:10:09*16*54 0000:10:0B*16*54 0000:10:0D*16*54 0000:10:0F*16*54
0000:10:09*17*54 0000:10:0B*17*54 0000:10:0D*17*54 0000:10:0F*17*54
Page 68
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
The most complex system would be an array of matrix delay clusters
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 69
IQSYN20
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
27/04/2010
Page 70
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
Firewall The firewall protects a digital signal output against propagation of errors or disruptions in the input signal. It ensures that the signal stream at that output is continuously valid no matter what happens at the input. If the input suffers any dropout, loss of data, or break or discontinuity in the carrier then this will not be reflected in the output. Default valid data will be used to pad the output stream such as video black, a freeze, or audio silence. The firewall does not ensure the pictures or the audio is what you want to see or hear of course, a corrupted signal can lead to loss of original content. It will ensure that whatever valid content you have it will get through however. In short it ensures the integrity, not the content, of the digital stream. How a firewall equipped product behaves The essential behavior of a system containing a firewall is that the input to the unit containing the firewall can be removed and later replaced with another signal and during this sequence the unit following the one with the firewall will see no disturbance at its input. Why use a firewall? Any equipment downstream of a Snell & Wilcox product with firewall protection can expect to be fed with a continuous input stream. Dropouts in the signal, disturbances due to switching and errors in the composition of the signal will not penetrate the firewall and will therefore not corrupt operations downstream. The examples below illustrate where firewalls are of most benefit. At the beginning of a chain They are excellent for use at the beginning of a chain. Traditionally a damaged signal would be passed by all equipment in a chain. This meant that each unit would lose lock on the digital signal it was passing. The damage in the signal would immediately appear at the input to every device all the way through to the last point in the chain. When the signal was restored, each unit in the chain might take a few seconds to recover. The next unit would not start recovery until the previous unit had locked to the signal again. The effect could be a huge delay in restoring the signal by the end of the chain as each unit recovered one by one. A minor flaw in the input signal such as a tiny break in the carrier could lead to several seconds of disruption on the output. To protect MPEG encoders Many people have found to their regret that MPEG encoders do not survive a break in the integrity of their input signal. They often corrupt their output and take a long time to recover. Video synchronizers can help but they only protect the video. Loss of the audio would prove terminal even though the integrity of the video was maintained. For transmission encoders this could mean a break in the output. For recording encoders such as those in a video server this often meant the recording was lost. Placing a Snell & Wilcox firewall product in front of any such encoders will ensure that they never get disrupted in this way even though there may be a break in the incoming content. How a firewall is tested A variety of equipment is used to test the firewall behavior. The test consists of analyzing the data downstream of the firewall product looking for discontinuities in the signal stream. While it is intended that all products fed by a firewall equipped unit will accept the signal as uninterrupted, it is IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 71
IQSYN20
Version 2 Issue 6
accepted that there is a wide variety of real-world performances. Therefore the reference product used to test whether the output streams are continuous is the Snell & Wilcox IQMUX01 for both AES and SDI signals. Performance of firewall equipped products versus genlock mode The tables below summarize the behavior of products for different genlock modes: Synchronizer Mode Referenced
Input locked
Free run
SDI Video
Firewall
No firewall
Firewall
Embedded Audio (PCM)
No Firewall
No Firewall
No Firewall
Ancillary Data
No Firewall
No Firewall
No Firewall
When Firewall Protection is not provided Video The firewall protects against disruption or illegal signals at the input and not against corrupt or illegal reference provision. The user should also note that when changing genlock mode, the firewall is not maintained for the video output during the change. Examples would include changing from freerunning mode to referenced mode or when the reference is adjusted or interrupted.
IQSYN20
27/04/2010
Page 72
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
IQSRT10 HD/SD-SDI 8x2 Router The IQSRT10 is an eight input router/switcher for HD-SDI 1.5Gbit/s, SD-SDI 270Mbit/s, DVB-ASI and wide-band signals. This module offers a complete routing solution in a tiny package with GPI control, true tallies and 16 HD cross-points. By offering a full eight inputs and two outputs many local HD/SD routing requirements can be solved. The two feeds can be used as two
independent destinations. Examples include main and redundant feeds, or main and preset outputs or even as a main and a preview output. The inclusion of true tallies in straight-forward tally per cross-point form enhances the robustness of compact low-cost routing solution over simpler dumb modular solutions.
REAR PANEL VIEW
2 1
4 3
1 SER OUT 2 5
1
IQSRT1 _28-2A
SERIAL IN 7 6
GPI
2 8
SERIAL IN
2
SER OUT 1
Versions of the module cards available are: IQSRT1028-2A HD/SD-SDI 8x2 Router. 2 x 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs,
Double width module
Note that this module can only be fitted into the ‘A’ Style Enclosure shown below.
(Enclosure order codes IQH3A-E-0, IQH3A-E-P, IQH3A-0-0, IQH3A-0-P)
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 1
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Block Diagram
Carrier Detector
Wideband Routing Switch
Inputs
Carrier Detector
SDI TX
1
CRC and EDH Checking
Advanced Re-clocker
SDI TX
2
Re-clock Bypass
Timing Select Output Format Selector
Ref In
Advanced Re-clocker
Re-clock Bypass
Standard Detection 8 HD & SD-SDI RX & Equalisation
CRC and EDH checking
Outputs
2 HD & SD-SDI RX & Equalisation
Standard Detection
Switch Control
Built-in Intelligence
GPI Control and TTL Pulse I/O
I/O
Carrier Detector
24 X GPI/O
1 HD & SD-SDI RX & Equalisation
Network intelligence, control and monitoring
Features • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HD/SD-SDI router with SMPTE RP168 switching when timed to an external reference Standards supported: HD-SDI to SMPTE292M SD-SDI to SMPTE259M-C DVB-ASI Can be used to select between inputs of different standards Sixteen true tallies, providing feedback for all inputs on both outputs Two outputs of each destination Choice of SD bi-level or HD tri-level reference switching Handles HD-SDI or SD-SDI/ASI sources with re-clocking Handles other wide-band signals without re-clocking Comprehensive button per cross-point, or multi-destination control from RPAN router control panel, or from GPIs Optional RS-422 control with separate IQSPI00 module
Reference capabilities. When a HD output standard is selected all reference types can be detected and used (within the limits defined by the compatibility matrix), i.e. bi-level and tri-level syncs.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 2
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Technical Profile Input and Outputs
Signal Inputs
Connector / Format .............BNC/ 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Inputs ..................................8 x Serial Digital Input(s)
Return Loss.........................> –15dB
Electrical ............................1.5Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259MC/DVB-ASI
Signal Outputs
Input Cable Length..............Up to 140m Belden 1694A @ 1.5 Gbit/s Up to 350m Belden 1694A @ 270 Mbit/s
Electrical .............................1.5Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259MC/DVB-ASI
Outputs................................2 x 2 Serial Digital Outputs
Connector / Format .............BNC/ 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Analog Reference ...............1 x Analog Reference to SMPTE240/ 274M and RS170A
Return Loss.........................> –15dB
Indicators and Controls Indicators
Router Configuration ...........Displays current router channel allocation
Power ..................................OK
Channel Renaming .............Labeling of all input channels
CPU.....................................OK
User Memories....................16 x Save / Recall / Rename
Status ..................................OK (Green) Warning (Yellow) Error (Red)
Logging ...............................Input Status (1-8) CRC/EDH Error Input Standard Ref Status Output 1/2 standard
GPI Control 24 programmable GPI/Os ...8 Tallies Output 1 8 Tallies Output 2 8 Router Selection
RollTrack Controls...............On/Off, Index, Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending.
RollCall Features Router Control.....................Switching control of input to output channels
RollTrack Outputs ...............Input present - 1 to 8 Output 1 Tallies Output 2 Tallies Reference OK Input Loss - 1 to 8 Unused
Specifications Inputs Reference Source ...............External – HD Tri-Level / SD Bilevel / Output Video syncs Power Consumption Module Power Consumption 10.5 W
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 3
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
INPUT CONNECTIONS 2
SERIAL DIGITAL VIDEO INPUTS
4
1
5
SERIAL IN
The eight serial digital inputs to the unit are made via these BNC connectors that terminate in 75 Ohms. Reference Input
3
7 6
GPI
8
SERIAL IN
The external reference sync input to the unit is made via this BNC connector for 75 Ohms. Note that this input is internally terminated by 75 Ohms by way of a header pin. This can be removed to give no internal termination. IQSR _28-
It should be noted that proper operation to the full specification can only be achieved with a correctly terminated, noise-free, stable, black sync reference input.
1
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Serial Output 1 These are the two Serial Digital outputs for channel 1 of the unit via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.
2
SER OUT 1
SER OUT 2 1
Serial Output 2
2
These are the two Serial Digital outputs for channel 2 of the unit via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 4
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
I S S U E
4
RT1 -2A
COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS
1
GPI The 24 programmable GPIO are made to the unit via a 26 way High-Density D type connector. Pin Connections (Listed by physical layout) PIN No. 10 1 19 11 2 20 12 3 21 13 4 22 14 5 23 15 6 24 16 7 25 17 8 26 18 9
NAME
GPI
Pin Connections (Listed by pin number)
DESCRIPTION
PIN No.
DESCRIPTION
Ground
GND
1
GROUND
Ground
GND
2
GPIO 1
GPI/O17
Signal GPI/O 17
3
GPIO 2
GPI/O9
Signal GPI/O 9
4
GPIO 3
GPI/O1
Signal GPI/O 1
5
GPIO 4
GPI/O18
Signal GPI/O 18
6
GPIO 5
GPI/O10
Signal GPI/O 10
7
GPIO 6
GPI/O2
Signal GPI/O 2
8
GPIO 7
GPI/O19
Signal GPI/O 19
9
GPIO 8
GPI/O11
Signal GPI/O 11
10
GROUND
GPI/O3
Signal GPI/O 3
11
GPIO 9
GPI/O20
Signal GPI/O 20
12
GPIO 10
GPI/O12
Signal GPI/O 12
13
GPIO 11
GPI/O4
Signal GPI/O 4
14
GPIO 12
GPI/O21
Signal GPI/O 21
15
GPIO 13
GPI/O13
Signal GPI/O 13
16
GPIO 14
GPI/O5
Signal GPI/O 5
17
GPIO 15
GPI/O22
Signal GPI/O 22
18
GPIO 16
GPI/O14
Signal GPI/O 14
19
GPIO 17
GPI/O6
Signal GPI/O 6
20
GPIO 18
GPI/O23
Signal GPI/O 23
21
GPIO 19
GPI/O15
Signal GPI/O 15
22
GPIO 20
GPI/O7
Signal GPI/O 7
23
GPIO 21
GPI/O24
Signal GPI/O 24
24
GPIO 22
GPI/O16
Signal GPI/O 16
25
GPIO 23
GPI/O8
Signal GPI/O 8
26
GPIO 24
GPI response time. The response time of the GPI inputs is approx 3ms. In order to perform a synchronous switch within the same frame, the GPI action must be received at least 3ms before the RP168 synchronous switchpoint for that output standard. e.g. to switch a 1080 29I standard output, the GPI request must be received 3ms before line 7.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 5
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
IQSRT10 GPIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 6
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
CARD EDGE INDICATORS
+ Power OK - Power OK CPU OK
Status
OK Warning Error
LED INDICATORS +Power and -Power When illuminated these LED’s indicate that the positive and negative supplies are present. CPU OK
+ Power OK - Power OK CPU OK
This led will flash to indicate that the CPU is running. Error (Red) When illuminated indicates that CRC/EDH errors are being detected in one or both of the output SDI streams. Status
Warning (Yellow)
OK Warning Error
When illuminated indicates that one of the output signals is not being reclocked i.e. in wideband mode. OK (Green) When illuminated indicates that the deserializers are locked on both SDI output streams.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 7
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
RollCall PC Control Panel Screens for the IQSRT10
Crosspoint Select This function allows the input/output routing to be set up by checking the boxes for the source and destination channels. Enable Take (Applies to Primary Channels Only) When selected, this enables the user to make changes to the routing matrix on the template without actually configuring the crosspoint until the Take button(s) is pressed. Take Both Immediate If selected in conjunction with Enable Take, when Take Both is clicked the outputs are switched synchronously. Note that if Enable Take is not selected, this option has no effect. Take Both
This allows the primary and secondary sources to be selected for Output 1 and Output 2.
(When Enable Take is checked)
This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on both outputs. If the Take Both Immediate option is also selected, the outputs are switched synchronously. If the Take Both Immediate option is not selected, the outputs are switched consecutively. Take 1
Wideband When checked this turns off the reclocking feature of a particular output to enable wideband signals to be passed through the router. OP:Primary or OP Secondary This will show either Primary or Secondary depending on the status of the selected inputs.
(When Enable Take is checked)
This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on Output 1 only. Take 2
Output_1 and Output_2
(When Enable Take is checked)
Primary This selects which input is to be routed to that particular output. Secondary
This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on Output 2 only.
This selects which input will be routed in the event of the primary input failing. Auto Switch
Cancel This will cancel any changes made to the routing matrix on the template since the last ‘Take’. Note that Inputs can be renamed in the ‘Name Association’ screen.
Should the primary input return, the router will automatically re-route it when this item is checked. Note that this function is only available when Secondary switching is checked. Switch to Primary If the primary input fails and Auto Switch is unchecked the output will stay on secondary until Switch to Primary is selected.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 8
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Output 1 and 2 Switching Setup This allows the switching parameters to be setup. Note that for this and other screens the following applies to the scroll bars: The and symbols at the ends of the scroll bar allow the value to be adjusted in discrete steps. The numerical value will be shown above the scroll will return the bars and selecting Preset setting to the calibrated value for that item.
Enable Synchronous Switching This configures the router to do all routing changes for that output using synchronous switching depending on user settings. When disabled, all other options on the page will be grayed out. Synchronous Source This allows either Output SDI stream or the External Analog reference to be chosen as a reference source for synchronous switching. SDI Output When checked the SDI output will provide the timing for synchronous switching between the inputs. External When checked the external reference input will provide the timing for synchronous switching between the inputs. Switch Point This allows synchronous switching in Field 1 or field 2 of output 2 SDI stream to be chosen. For progressive standards, the field 2 option is grayed out. Field 1 / Frame When checked the switching point will be during Field 1. Field 2 When checked the switching point will be during Field 2.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 9
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Output 1 and 2 Switching Setup (continued) Switch Point Adjustment Field 1 / Frame Switch Point Adjustment Field 2 If Force RP168 is checked, the synchronous switching will be done to SMPTE RP168. If unchecked, the switch point is user adjustable in line and pixel increments throughout the whole frame. Note that for progressive standards, the Field 2 settings will be grayed out. Line A particular line may be chosen for the switching point. Pixel A particular number of pixels during the selected line may be chosen for the switching point. Force (SMPTE) RP168 When selected the switching point will conform to (SMPTE) RP168. Status This shows the status of the synchronous switching. It may show: EXT
Uses external reference
SDI
Uses SDI signal
ASYNC-No REF
When synchronous switching is selected and external reference is selected but the External Reference signal is unsuitable or missing
ASYNC-Selected
When synchronous switching is disabled
ASYNC–Unknown
When the reference standard is unknown
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 10
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Name Association This allows the naming of the inputs. Changes made here will be reflected on the Crosspoint Select screen. To change the name, type the new name in the (return). text area and then select Selecting Preset default name.
will return the text to the
Memory 1-8, 9-16 This function allows a number of particular setups of the IQSRT10 to be saved and recalled. There are 16 memory locations available. (Memory 1-8 and Memory 9-16) Memory 1 to 8 (9-16) The name of the memory location may be changed. To change the memory name, type the new name (return). in the text area and then select Selecting Preset default name.
will return the text to the
Selecting this item will save the current setup in the memory location.
Selecting this item will recall the setup in the memory location. Note that these buttons have a momentary action.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 11
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Logging Information about various parameters can be made available to a logging device that is attached to the RollCall™ network by checking the appropriate box. Any of the items may be selected from the Logging Control list in the first column. The Logging Field is shown in the second column and the Value (status) is shown in the third column. Any of the items may be selected from the list.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 12
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Logging Details Log Description
Log Field Name
Possible Values
Log Input 1 State
INPUT_1_STATE=
OK
to
to
FAIL:LOST
Log Input 8
INPUT_8_STATE=
Log Output 1 Type
OUTPUT_1_TYPE=
Log Output 2 Type
OUTPUT_2_TYPE=
Log Output 1 Routing
OUTPUT_1_ROUTING=
OP1 OK OP1 NONE OP1 HD SDI OP1 SD SDI OP1 UNKNOWN Input_1
Log Output 2 Routing
OUTPUT_2_ROUTING=
Input_2
OP2 OK OP2 NONE OP2 HD SDI OP2 SD SDI OP2 UNKNOWN
Input_3 Input_4 Input_5 If the output name has been edited, the edited name is used. OP2 1125(1035)/30i OP1 1125(1035)/30i OP1 1125(1035)/29i OP2 1125(1035)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/30i OP1 1125(1080)/30i OP2 1125(1080)/29i OP1 1125(1080)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/25i OP1 1125(1080)/25i OP1 1125(1080)/24sF OP2 1125(1080)/24sF OP1 1125(1080)/23sF OP2 1125(1080)/23sF OP2 1125(1080)/30p OP1 1125(1080)/30p OP2 1125(1080)/29p OP1 1125(1080)/29p OP2 1125(1080)/25p OP1 1125(1080)/25p OP2 1125(1080)/24p OP1 1125(1080)/24p OP2 1125(1080)/23p OP1 1125(1080)/23p OP2 750(720)/60p OP1 750(720)/60p OP2 750(720)/59p OP1 750(720)/59p OP2 750(720)/50p OP1 750(720)/50p OP2 750(720)/30p OP1 750(720)/30p OP2 750(720)/29p OP1 750(720)/29p OP1 750(720)/25p OP2 750(720)/25p OP2 750(720)/24p OP1 750(720)/24p OP2 750(720)/23p OP1 750(720)/23p OP2 625(576)/25i OP1 625(576)/25i OP2 525(480)/29i OP1 525(480)/29i
Log Output 1 Standard
OUTPUT_1_STANDARD=
Log Output 2 Standard
OUTPUT_2_STANDARD=
Log Ext Reference
EXTREF_1=
Log External Reference Type
EXTREF_1_TYPE=
Log External Reference Standard
EXTREF_1_STANDARD=
WARN:LOST Ref OK Ref NONE Ref HD SDI Ref SD SDI Ref UNKNOWN Ref 1125(1080)/30i Ref 1125(1080)/29i Ref 1125(1080)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/24sF Ref 1125(1080)/23sF Ref 1125(1080)/30p Ref 1125(1080)/29p
Log CRC Errors Output 1
OUTPUT_1_CRC=
OK
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
OK
www.snellgroup.com
Ref 750(720)/60p Ref 750(720)/59p Ref 750(720)/50p Ref 750(720)/30p Ref 750(720)/29p Ref 750(720)/25p Ref 625(576)/25i Ref 525(480)/29i
Page 13
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
Log Description
Log Field Name OUTPUT_2_CRC=
WARN: CRC ERROR
Log Up Time
UPTIME=
Log SN
SN=
Log SW Build Number
BUILD_NUMBER=
Log OS Version
OS_VERSION=
Log Hardware Version
HARDWARE_VERSION=
08/02/2010
I S S U E
4
Possible Values
Log CRC Errors Output 2
SRT10OPS
1
www.snellgroup.com
Page 14
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
GPIO (General Purpose Interface) This screen allows the GPI functions to be configured. The 24 GPIO's on the router are individually configurable as GPI (Input) or GPO (Output) and can be programmed for different tasks. GPIO DEBUG ENABLE
When checked, the debug settings will take priority over the setup options and the setup options will be grayed out. Index This allows the GPI port (1 to 24) to be selected. The selected port may then be configured using the functions listed below. Enable When checked the GPIO functions for the selected port will be active; when unchecked GPIO functions will be disabled. Input When checked the GPIO port will become an input device GPI). Active High (Port configured as an Input) The port will respond to a signal that changes from a low (closed contact) to a high (open contact). Active Low (Port configured as an Input) The port will respond to a signal that changes from a high (open contact) to a low (closed contact). Output Actions List When checked the GPIO port will become an output device (GPO). Active High (Port configured as an Output) The port will produce an output that changes from a low (closed contact) to a high (open contact).
The actions in the list will change according to whether the GPI/O is selected as GPI input or GPI output. Each GPI/O can be assigned an individual task by selecting an option from this list. The action will then be associated with the GPI/O selected by the Index bar.
Active Low (Port configured as an Output) The port will produce an output that changes from a high (open contact) to a low (closed contact).
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 15
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Options when GPI/O configured as outputs (GPO) GPO to Reflect SDI Output 1, 2 Status Take Mode Enabled Take Both Ready
Take Output 1 Ready Take Output 2 Ready
Input 1 OK Input 2 OK Input 3 OK Input 4 OK Input 5 OK Input 6 OK Input 7 OK Input 8 OK Input 1->Output 1 Input 2->Output 1 Input 3->Output 1 Input 4->Output 1 Input 5->Output 1 Input 6->Output 1 Input 7->Output 1 Input 8->Output 1 Input 1->Output 2 Input 2->Output 2 Input 3->Output 2 Input 4->Output 2 Input 5->Output 2 Input 6->Output 2 Input 7->Output 2 Input 8->Output 2
OP1 625(576)/25i OP1 525(480)/29i
OP1 OK OP1 None OP1 HD OP1 SD OP1 Unknown
OP2 750(720)/60p OP2 750(720)/59p OP2 750(720)/50p OP2 750(720)/30p OP2 750(720)/29p OP2 750(720)/25p OP2 750(720)/24p OP2 750(720)/23p
OP1 ASI OP1 1125(1035)/30i OP1 1125(1035)/29i
OP2 OK OP2 None OP2 HD OP2 SD OP2 Unknown OP2 ASI OP2 1125(1035)/30i OP2 1125(1035)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/30i OP2 1125(1080)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/25i OP2 1125(1080)/24sF OP2 1125(1080)/23sF OP2 1125(1080)/30p OP2 1125(1080)/29p OP2 1125(1080)/25p OP2 1125(1080)/24p OP2 1125(1080)/23p
OP2 625(576)/25i OP2 525(480)/29i
OP1 1125(1080)/30i OP1 1125(1080)/29i OP1 1125(1080)/25i OP1 1125(1080)/24sF OP1 1125(1080)/23sF OP1 1125(1080)/30p OP1 1125(1080)/29p OP1 1125(1080)/25p OP1 1125(1080)/24p OP1 1125(1080)/23p OP1 750(720)/60p OP1 750(720)/59p OP1 750(720)/50p OP1 750(720)/30p OP1 750(720)/29p OP1 750(720)/25p OP1 750(720)/24p OP1 750(720)/23p
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 16
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
GPO to Reflect External Reference Status Ref OK Ref None Ref HD Ref SD Ref Unknown Ref 1125(1080)/30i Ref 1125(1080)/29i Ref 1125(1080)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/24sF Ref 1125(1080)/23sF Ref 1125(1080)/30p Ref 1125(1080)/29p Ref 750(720)/60p Ref 750(720)/59p Ref 750(720)/50p Ref 750(720)/30p Ref 750(720)/29p Ref 750(720)/25p Ref 625(576)/25i Ref 525(480)/29i
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
1
I S S U E
4
Options when GPIO configured as inputs (GPI)
Input 1->Output 1 Input 2->Output 1 Input 3->Output 1 Input 4->Output 1 Input 5->Output 1 Input 6->Output 1 Input 7->Output 1 Input 8->Output 1 Input 1->Output 2 Input 2->Output 2 Input 3->Output 2 Input 4->Output 2 Input 5->Output 2 Input 6->Output 2 Input 7->Output 2 Input 8->Output 2 OP1 IP Switch Bit 0 OP1 IP Switch Bit 1 OP1 IP Switch Bit 2 OP2 IP Switch Bit 0 OP2 IP Switch Bit 1 OP2 IP Switch Bit 2 Take Output 1 Take Output 2 Take Both Outputs Cancel Take Recall Memory 1 Recall Memory 2 Recall Memory 3 Recall Memory 4 Recall Memory 5 Recall Memory 6 Recall Memory 7 Recall Memory 8 Recall Memory 9 Recall Memory 10 Recall Memory 11 Recall Memory 12 Recall Memory 13 Recall Memory 14 Recall Memory 15 Recall Memory 16
www.snellgroup.com
Page 17
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
GPIO Debug (Supervisor Level Only)
GPIO DEBUG GPIO DEBUG ENABLE
When checked, the debug settings will take priority over the setup options and the setup options (GPIO screen) will be grayed out.
This allows the manual testing of the GPIO ports and is useful for verifying GPI connections and the operation of external interfaces. If a particular GPIO port is selected as an Input, its status will be shown as either High or Low. If a particular GPIO is selected as an Output, it can then be set as Output Low or Output High.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 18
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
If the Output set box is not checked this would mean Output High.
IQSRT10 GPIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 19
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
RollTrack This function allows information to be sent, via the RollCall™ network, to other compatible units connected on the same network. For more detailed information, see the RollTrack section (Appendix) at the end of this manual. Disable All When selected this will disable all the RollTracks being generated from this unit. Index
Command
This item allows up to 32 destinations to be selected.
The full RollTrack command has two sets of numbers.
Source
For example: 84:156
This allows the source of information that triggers the transmission of data to be selected. Options are as listed on the next page.
The first set (84) is the RollTrack command number
The destination for the information is set by the network code address as follows:
The second set (156) is the value sent with the RollTrack command number
Address
RollTrack Sending
This item allows the address of the selected destination unit to be set.
This item shows when the unit is actively sending the RollTrack command.
To change the address, type the new destination
This may show:
in the text area and then select
(return).
Selecting (Preset) returns the address to the default destination.
String A string value is always being sent. Number A number value is always being sent. No The message is not being sent. Yes The message is being sent. Internal Type Error Inconsistent behavior; please contact your local Snell agent. RollTrack Status This item will show the status of the RollTrack system. For details of the RollCall command values for specific units please contact your local Snell agent.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 20
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
RollTrack Source Items Unused Input 1 OK Input 2 OK Input 3 OK Input 4 OK Input 5 OK Input 6 OK Input 7 OK Input 8 OK Input 1 None Input 2 None Input 3 None Input 4 None Input 5 None Input 6 None Input 7 None Input 8 None Input 1->Output 1 Input 2->Output 1 Input 3->Output 1 Input 4->Output 1 Input 5->Output 1 Input 6->Output 1 Input 7->Output 1 Input 8->Output 1 OP1 Not Input 1 OP1 Not Input 2 OP1 Not Input 3 OP1 Not Input 4 OP1 Not Input 5 OP1 Not Input 6 OP1 Not Input 7 OP1 Not Input 8 OP1 OK OP1 None OP1 HD OP1 SD OP1 Unknown OP1 1125(1035)/30i OP1 1125(1035)/29i OP1 1125(1080)/30i
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
OP1 1125(1080)/29i OP1 1125(1080)/25i OP1 1125(1080)/30p OP1 1125(1080)/29p OP1 1125(1080)/25p OP1 1125(1080)/24p OP1 1125(1080)/23p OP1 750(720)/60p OP1 750(720)/59p OP1 525(480)/29i OP1 625(576)/25i OP1 1125(1080)/24sF OP1 1125(1080)/23sF OP1 750(720)/50p OP1 750(720)/30p OP1 750(720)/29p OP1 750(720)/25p OP1 750(720)/24p OP1 750(720)/23p Input 1->Output 2 Input 2->Output 2 Input 3->Output 2 Input 4->Output 2 Input 5->Output 2 Input 6->Output 2 Input 7->Output 2 Input 8->Output 2 OP2 Not Input 1 OP2 Not Input 2 OP2 Not Input 3 OP2 Not Input 4 OP2 Not Input 5 OP2 Not Input 6 OP2 Not Input 7 OP2 Not Input 8 OP2 OK OP2 None OP2 HD OP2 SD OP2 Unknown OP2 1125(1035)/30i
www.snellgroup.com
OP2 1125(1035)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/30i OP2 1125(1080)/29i OP2 1125(1080)/25i OP2 1125(1080)/30p OP2 1125(1080)/29p OP2 1125(1080)/25p OP2 1125(1080)/24p OP2 1125(1080)/23p OP2 750(720)/60p OP2 750(720)/59p OP2 525(480)/29i OP2 625(576)/25i OP2 1125(1080)/24sF OP2 1125(1080)/23sF OP2 750(720)/50p OP2 750(720)/30p OP2 750(720)/29p OP2 750(720)/25p OP2 750(720)/24p OP2 750(720)/23p Ref OK Ref None Ref HD Ref SD Ref Unknown Ref 1125(1080)/30i Ref 1125(1080)/29i Ref 1125(1080)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/30p Ref 1125(1080)/29p Ref 750(720)/60p Ref 750(720)/59p Ref 525(480)/29i Ref 625(576)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/24sF Ref 1125(1080)/23sF Ref 750(720)/50p Ref 750(720)/30p Ref 750(720)/29p Ref 750(720)/25p
Page 21
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Setup This screen provides information about the unit. Product This shows the name of the unit. Serial This will show the serial number of the unit. Software Version This shows the software release version number. Build This will indicate the factory build number. This number defines all parameters of the unit (software versions, build level etc.) for identification purposes. Firmware This shows the version of the firmware system. KOS This shows the version of the operating system. PCB This shows the PCB revision number.
This will reboot the unit simulating a power-down power-up cycle restoring power-up settings.
Selecting this item sets all adjustment functions that include a preset facility, to their factory default values.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 22
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Setup (continued) The Information Window This will show the status of the unit on four lines of text. Line 1
Information Window
This displays the output standard for router output 1. It may show: OUT1: OUT1:
Output standard None Loss of input signal
Line 2 This displays the output standard for router output 2. It may show: OUT2: OUT2:
Output standard None Loss of input signal
Line 4 This will show standard of the connected analog reference signal.
Line 3
This shows which inputs 1-5 (1-8) have signals applied. Note that this only shows which inputs have detected a carrier signal present, not whether the signal is a suitable SDI format. It may show: INP: 1-8 Inputs that have a detected carrier signal present INP:
**
Inputs that do not have a detected carrier signal present
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 23
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
1125(1080)/30sF
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes?
Yes?
750(720)/60p
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1125(1080)/29i
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes? Yes
Yes?
1125(1035)/29i
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes? Yes
Yes?
1125(1080)/29sF
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes? Yes
Yes?
750(720)/59p
Yes
Yes
Yes
std_def 525 lines
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1125(1080)/25i
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes?
Yes?
1125(1080)/25sF
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes?
Yes?
Yes
Yes
Yes
std_def 625 lines
Yes
750(720)/50p
Yes
1125(1080)/24sF
Yes Yes
1125(1080)/23sF 1125 (1080)/30P
1125 (1080) 23P
Yes?
1125 (1080) 24P
Yes?
Yes Yes?
1125 (1080) 25P
Yes Yes?
Yes
750 (720) 50P
Yes
Yes
1125 (1080) 29P
1125 (1080) 30P
1125 (1080) 23sF
1125 (1080) 24sF
Standard def. 625 lines
1125 (1080) 25sF
1125 (1080) 25i
Standard def. 525 lines
Yes
1125(1035)/30i
750 (720) 59P
1125 (1080) 29sF
1125 (1080) 30sF
1125 (1035) 29i
1125 (1035) 30i
1125(1080)/30i
Output Standard
750 (720) 60P
1125 (1080) 30i
Reference Standard
1125 (1080) 29i
APPENDIX 1: Reference Switching Standard Compatibility with SDI Standard
Yes? Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1125 (1080)/29P
Yes
1125 (1080)/25P
Yes? Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
1125 (1080)/24P
Yes Yes
1125 (1080)/23P
Yes Yes
Yes
Explanation of Terms Yes .................... The output standard will be compatible with the reference standard Yes? .................. There is no field information on the reference, so the output field type is ambiguous. 1125 (1035) 30i
SRT10OPS
When the reference standard is shown grayed out this indicates an undetectable analog reference standard.
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 24
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Supported SDI and Reference Standards
Supported SDI Standards HD 1080 23p 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 29p 1080 30p 1080 25i 1080 29i 1080 30i 1035 29i 1035 30i 720 23p 720 24p 720 25p 720 29p 720 30p 720 50p 720 59p 720 60p
SD 525 29i 625 25i
Supported Reference Standards (For RP168). SD Bi-level Analogue Sync 525 29i 625 25i
HD tri-level Analogue Sync 1080 29p 1080 30p 1080 25I 1080 29i 1080 30I 1035 29i 1035 30I 720 23p 720 24p 720 25p 720 29p 720 30p 720 50p 720 59p 720 60p 1080 23sF/24sF
Note that sF formats other than 1080 23sF/24sF will be detected and treated as interlaced. See Appendix 1 for compatibility between external reference and SDI streams.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 25
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Operation from an Active Control Panel The card may be operated from an active control panel via the RollCall™ network.
All operational parameters and selections are made using a system of menus displayed in two LCD windows. Operational details for the remote control panel can be found in the Modular System Operator's Manual. Information Window The Information window has four lines of text indicating the current state of the unit.
OUT1:1125(1080)/29i OUT2:1125(1080)/29i INP: 123***** REF:1125(1080)/29i
For details of the abbreviations used please see page 22.
Control Window The Control window displays all Selection Menus and sub-menus.
The selection is made by pressing the button adjacent to the required item.
◀ ◀ ◀ ◀
Product…Version…▶ Build… KOS…▶ Serial…Firmware…▶ PCB… Factory…▶
The menu structure is detailed in the following pages.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 26
I Q S R T 1 0
SRT10OPS
V E R S I O N
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
1
I S S U E
4
Page 27
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
OPERATION FROM AN ACTIVE CONTROL PANEL The card may be operated with an active control panel via the RollCall™ network. The menus available for this card are shown opposite and will appear in the Control display window. Operational details for the remote control panel will be found in SECTION 1 of the Modular System Operator's Manual. (See IQSRT10 Menu System drawing on previous page) The system may be considered structured as a set of menus and sub-menus that are displayed in the LCD window. A new menu is selected by pressing the appropriate dedicated function button. If necessary a sub-menu may then be selected by pressing the push button adjacent to the arrowhead in the text line of the menu name. This sub-menu will then be displayed in the window and will have the option of selecting another sub-menu in the same manner, or allow the adjustment of a particular parameter. Parameters enabled will appear as highlighted reverse text (white text on a black background)
Main Menu IQSRT10 MAIN MENU Router...
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 28
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Crosspoint This menu allows the input/output routing to be set up by checking the boxes for the source and destination channels.
Enable Take (Applies to Primary Channels Only) When selected, this enables the user to make changes to the routing matrix on the template without actually configuring the crosspoint until the Take function(s) is selected. Take Both Immediate If selected in conjunction with Enable Take, when Take Both is selected the outputs are switched synchronously. Note that if Enable Take is not selected, this option has no effect. Take Both (When Enable Take is enabled) This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on both outputs. If the Take Both Immediate option is also selected, the outputs are switched synchronously. If the Take Both Immediate option is not selected, the outputs are switched consecutively. Take Output 1 (When Enable Take is enabled) This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on Output 1 only. Take Output 2 (When Enable Take is enabled) This will configure the crosspoint to make all changes made to the routing matrix on Output 2 only.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 30
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Cancel This will cancel any changes made to the routing matrix on the template since the last ‘Take’. Note that Inputs can be renamed in the ‘Name Association’ screen.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 31
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Wideband Output 1 and 2 When selected this turns off the reclocking feature of a particular output to enable wideband signals to be passed through the router. Output 1 and 2 This allows the primary and secondary sources to be selected for Output 1 and Output 2. Chroma_B/W Output_1, 2 Input_1 to Input_8
Inputs 1 to 8 may be selected. Output Status 1 and 2 This will display the status of the output. Secondary Enable 1 and 2 This allows a secondary input to be automatically selected if the selected primary input is lost. Secondary Auto Swit(ch) Should the primary input return, the router will automatically re-route it when this item is selected. Note that this function is only available when Secondary Enable is selected. Switch to Primary If the primary input fails and Auto Switch is not selected the output will stay on secondary until Switch to Primary is selected. Output 1 and 2 Secondary This selects which input will be routed in the event of the primary input failing. Output_1, Chroma_B/W 2 Secondary Input_1 to Input_8
Inputs 1 to 8 may be selected. Note that this control is only available when Secondary Enable is selected.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 32
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Output 1 and 2 Switching This allows the switching parameters to be setup for output 1 and 2. Output Chroma_B/W 1, 2 Switching Sync Status Synchronous Input Field Switch Point (F1) Switch Point (F2)
Sync Status This shows the status of the synchronous switching. It may show: EXT
Uses external reference
SDI
Uses SDI signal
ASYNC-No REF
When synchronous switching is selected and external reference is selected but the External Reference signal is unsuitable or missing
ASYNC-Selected
When synchronous switching is disabled
ASYNC–Unknown
When the reference standard is unknown
Synchronous This configures the router to do all routing changes for that output using synchronous switching depending on user settings. When disabled, all other options will be not be available.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 33
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Input This allows the timing source for synchronous switching to be selected. Input SDI Output External
SDI Output When checked the SDI output will provide the timing for synchronous switching between the inputs. External When checked the external reference input will provide the timing for synchronous switching between the inputs. Field This allows synchronous switching in Field 1 or field 2 of output 2 SDI stream to be chosen. Field Field 1/Frame Field 2
Note that for progressive standards, the field 2 option is not available. Field 1 / Frame When selected the switching point will be during Field 1. Field 2 When selected the switching point will be during Field 2.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 34
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Switch Point (F1, F2) Switch Point (F1, F2) Force RP168 (F1, F2) Line Pixel
If Force RP168 is selected, the synchronous switching will be done to SMPTE RP168. If not selected, the switch point is user adjustable in line and pixel increments throughout the whole frame. Note that for progressive standards, the Field 2 settings will be grayed out. Force RP168 (F1, F2) When selected the switching point will conform to (SMPTE) RP168. Line A particular line may be chosen for the switching point. Line/Pixel Line/Pixel 10000 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ OK
The adjustment range is from 1 to 2000 lines in steps of 1 line. Pixel A particular number of pixels during the selected line may be chosen for the switching point. Line/Pixel Line/Pixel 10000 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ OK
The adjustment range is from 1 to 5000 pixels in steps of 1 pixel.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 35
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
GPIO Debug Chroma_B/W GPIO Debug Debug Enable Direction Input Output GPI 0 to GPI 23
DEBUG ENABLE
When selected the debug settings will take priority over the setup options and the setup options will be not be available out. Naming This allows the naming of the inputs. Changes made here will be reflected in the Crosspoint menu. Chroma_B/W Naming Name Input 1 to Name Input 8
Name Input 1-8 Name Input 1-8 Name Input 1-8 Input 1 Clear Preset
OK
To edit the text the buttons adjacent to the upper text line in the menu are used to select the character position in the text and the spinwheel used to select the character. (The right ▶ and left ◀ buttons select the cursor position and the spinwheel selects the character; the Clear button removes all text in the line, Preset sets the text line to the default name and the OK button accepts the new name.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 36
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
GPIO (General Purpose Interface) This menu allows the GPI functions to be configured. The 24 GPIO's on the router are individually configurable as GPI (Input) or GPO (Output) and can be programmed for different tasks. Chroma_B/W GPIO Index Enable Direction Sense GPO Action GPI Event
Index This allows the GPI port (1 to 24) to be selected. Index Index 12 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ OK
The selected port may then be configured using the functions listed below. Enable When selected the GPIO functions for the selected port will be active; when not selected all GPIO functions will be disabled. Direction This allows the selected GPI port to be configured as an Iput or an Output. Direction Input Output
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 37
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Sense This allows the port polarity to be set. Sense Active High Active Low
Active High (Port configured as an Input) The port will respond to a signal that changes from a low (closed contact) to a high (open contact). Active Low (Port configured as an Input) The port will respond to a signal that changes from a high (open contact) to a low (closed contact). Active High (Port configured as an Output) The port will produce an output that changes from a low (closed contact) to a high (open contact). Active Low (Port configured as an Output) The port will produce an output that changes from a high (open contact) to a low (closed contact). GPO Action A GPI output can be made to occur due to an action selected from the Action list. GPO Action Action
Note that the Action menu will be empty if the GPI is set to input.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 38
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Actions The actions in the list will change according to whether the GPI/O is selected as GPI input or GPI output. Each GPI/O can be assigned an individual task by selecting an option from this list. The action will then be associated with the GPI/O selected in the Index menu. Chroma_B/W Action Input 1 OK to Input 8 OK Input 1->Output 1 to Input 8->Output 1 Input 1->Output 2 to Input 8->Output 2 OP1, 2 OK OP1, 2 None OP1, 2 HD OP1, 2 SD OP1, 2 Unknown OP1, 2 ASI OP1, 2 1125(1035)/30i OP1, 2 1125(1035)/29i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/30i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/29i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/25i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/30p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/29p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/25p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/24p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/23p OP1, 2 750(720)/60p OP1, 2 750(720)/59p OP1, 2 525(480)/29i OP1, 2 625(576)/25i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/24sF OP1, 2 1125(1080)/23sF OP1, 2 750(720)/50p OP1, 2 750(720)/30p OP1, 2 750(720)/29p OP1, 2 750(720)/25p OP1, 2 750(720)/24p OP1, 2 750(720)/23p Ref OK Ref None Ref HD Ref SD Ref Unknown Ref 1125(1080)/30i Ref 1125(1080)/29i Ref 1125(1080)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/30p Ref 1125(1080)/29p Ref 750(720)/60p Ref 750(720)/59p Ref 525(480)/29i Ref 625(576)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/24sF Ref 1125(1080)/23sF Ref 750(720)/50p Ref 750(720)/30p Ref 750(720)/29p Ref 750(720)/25p Take Mode Enabled Take Both Ready Take OP1 Ready Take OP2 Ready
For more details please see page N5.15
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 39
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
GPI Event When a GPI input is received the event that occurs may be chosen from the GPI Event list GPI Event Event
Chroma_B/W Event Input 1->Output 1 to Input 8->Output 1 Input 1->Output 2 to Input 8->Output 2 OP1 IP Switch Bit 0 OP1 IP Switch Bit 1 OP1 IP Switch Bit 2 OP2 IP Switch Bit 0 OP2 IP Switch Bit 1 OP2 IP Switch Bit 2 Take Output 1 Take Output 2 Take Both Outputs Cancel Take Recall Memory 1 to Recall Memory 16
Note that the Event menu will be empty if the GPI is set to output. GPIO Preset Chroma_B/W GPIO Preset Allow Preset Select GPIO Preset 1 GPIO Preset 2 GPIO Preset 3
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 40
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Memories This function allows a number of particular setups of the IQSRT10 to be saved and recalled. There are 16 memory locations available. This item allows any of the 16 memory locations to be selected. Chroma_B/W Memories Memory 1... to Memory 16...
Memory 1 to 16 Memory 1 to 16 Save 1-16 Name 1-16
Recall 1-16
When a memory location has been selected this item allows it to be saved, recalled or renamed. Save 1-16 When selected the current settings will be saved at this location. Recall 1-16 When selected the settings will be recalled from this location and applied to the unit. Name 1-16 The selected memory location may be renamed with this function. Name Memory 1-16 Name Memory 1-16 memory_name Clear OK Preset
The ◀ Clear function blanks the selected character. The ◀ Preset function loads the default text, for example, Memory 1. O.K. ▶ saves the memory name text and returns to the main menu.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 41
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
RollCall RollCall RollTrack...
RollTrack This function allows information to be sent, via the RollCall™ network, to other compatible units connected on the same network. Chroma_B/W RollTrack Disable All Source... Command Sending
Index Address Status
For more detailed information, see the RollTrack section (Appendix) at the end of this manual. Disable All When selected this will disable all the RollTracks being generated from this unit. Index There are 32 (1 to 32) RollTrack destinations available. Index Index 0 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ OK
This item is used to select which RollTrack Index is set up using the RollTrack Source, RollTrack Address and RollTrack Command functions.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 42
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Source This selects the source of information that triggers the transmission of the RollTrack data. Chroma_B/W Source Unused Input 1 OK to Input 8 OK Input 1 None to Input 8 None Input 1->Output 1 to Input 8->Output 1 OP1 Not Input 1 to OP1 Not Input 8 OP1, 2 OK OP1, 2 None OP1, 2 HD OP1, 2 SD OP1, 2 Unknown OP1, 2 ASI OP1, 2 1125(1035)/30i OP1, 2 1125(1035)/29i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/30i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/29i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/25i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/30p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/29p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/25p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/24p OP1, 2 1125(1080)/23p OP1, 2 750(720)/60p OP1, 2 750(720)/59p OP1, 2 525(480)/29i OP1, 2 625(576)/25i OP1, 2 1125(1080)/24sF OP1, 2 1125(1080)/23sF OP1, 2 750(720)/50p OP1, 2 750(720)/30p OP1, 2 750(720)/29p OP1, 2 750(720)/25p OP1, 2 750(720)/24p OP1, 2 750(720)/23p Input 1->Output 2 to Input 8->Output 2 OP2 Not Input 1 to OP2 Not Input 8 Ref OK Ref None Ref HD Ref SD Ref Unknown Ref 1125(1080)/30i Ref 1125(1080)/29i Ref 1125(1080)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/30p Ref 1125(1080)/29p Ref 750(720)/60p Ref 750(720)/59p Ref 525(480)/29i Ref 625(576)/25i Ref 1125(1080)/24sF Ref 1125(1080)/23sF Ref 750(720)/50p Ref 750(720)/30p Ref 750(720)/29p Ref 750(720)/25p
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 43
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
The destination for the information is set by the network code address as follows: Address
This item allows the network address of the selected destination unit to be set. Address
Address 0 Clear Preset
OK
To edit the text the buttons adjacent to the upper text line in the menu are used to select the character position in the text and the spinwheel used to select the character. (The right ▶ and left ◀ buttons select the cursor position and the spinwheel selects the character; the clear button sets the text line to all zero’s and the OK button accepts the network address) The full RollTrack address has four sets of numbers For example: 0000:10:01*99 The first set (0000) is the network segment code number The second set (10) is the number identifying the (enclosure/mainframe) unit. The third set (01) is the slot number in the unit The fourth set (99) is a user settable number that is a unique identification number for the destination unit in a multi-unit system. This ensures that only the correct unit will respond to the command. If left at 00 an incorrectly fitted unit may respond inappropriately. Command Command Command 0 Clear Preset
SRT10OPS
OK
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 44
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
The full RollTrack command has two sets of numbers For example: 84:156 The first set (84) is the RollTrack command number. The second set (156) is the value sent with the RollTrack command number For details of the RollCall command values for specific units please contact your local Snell agent. Status This item will show the status of the RollTrack system. Status Status xxxxxxx
OK
Sending Sending Sending xxxxxxx
OK
This item shows when the unit is actively sending the RollTrack command. This may show: String A string value is always being sent. Number A number value is always being sent. No The message is not being sent. Yes The message is being sent. Internal Type Error Inconsistent behavior; please contact your local Snell agent.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 45
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Logging Information about various parameters can be made available to a logging device that is attached to the RollCall™ network by selecting the item in the list. Any of the items may be selected from the list. Selecting a Log item e.g. Log Input 1 Status, in the list (text highlighted) will make that item available for logging.
The logging information will be displayed when the associated item INPUT_1_STATUS= (in this example) is selected. Logging Items Logging Items xxxxxxx
OK
For more details of the logging items please see page 13.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 46
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
Setup This allows information about various items to be displayed. Setup Version Product KOS Build Firmware Serial Factory Default PCB Restart
Setup Items This displays information about the selected item. Setup Items Setup Items xxxxxxx
OK
Product This shows the name of the unit. Version This shows the software release identification. Build This will indicate the factory build number. This number defines all parameters of the unit (software versions, build level etc.) for identification purposes. KOS This shows the version of the operating system. Serial This will show the serial number of the unit. Firmware This shows the version of the firmware system PCB This shows the PCB revision number. Factory Default Selecting this item sets all adjustment functions that include a preset facility, to their factory default values.
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 47
I Q S R T 1 0
V E R S I O N
1
I S S U E
4
IQSRT10 GPIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
SRT10OPS
08/02/2010
www.snellgroup.com
Page 48
IQDMENCS PAL/NTSC/SECAM Encoder with Synchronizer - 10 bit The IQDMENCS provides serial 4:2:2 to composite analog encoding. Fully genlockable as standard.
Does this module suit your application?
• • • • • • • • • • • •
EDH checking on SDI input
Full genlock and minimum delay operation
• • •
Full Frame synchronizer
Why should you choose this module?
10-bit oversampled DAC with CCIR quality reconstruction
•
High quality encoding for PAL/NTSC/SECAM broadcast test, monitoring and recording applications
•
Full genlock and minimum delay functions ensure accurate timing of composite video
•
Tolerant of SMPTE168 serial switching to minimize video disturbance
•
RollCall ensures the control capability required by any system
PAL/NTSC/SECAM encoder
Up to 6 Composite outputs Up to 2 Serial 4:2:2 outputs Internal color bar generator and VITS Generation Pass or blank vertical interval data Selectable SECAM Bottles SECAM genlock to PAL switch or SECAM
RollTrack to link tracking audio delays RollCall compatible
SECAM dynamic notch Tolerant of SMPTE RP168 serial switching
Order codes for IQH3A enclosures
Order codes for other enclosures
IQDMENCS-1A-S 10 bit (PAL/NTSC/SECAM) Encoder with Synchronizer. Full Genlock. 3 composite, 2 serial 4:2:2 outputs.
IQDMENCS-1-S 10 bit (PAL/NTSC/SECAM) Encoder with Synchronizer. Full Genlock. 2 composite, 1 serial 4:2:2 outputs
IQDMENCS-2A-S 10 bit (PAL/NTSC/SECAM) Encoder with Synchronizer. Full Genlock. 5 composite, 2 serial 4:2:2 outputs. For more details on enclosure types please refer to the Frames/Enclosures section
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
www.snellwilcox.com
IQDMENCS PAL/NTSC/SECAM Encoder with Synchronizer - 10 bit Signal Inputs & Outputs Signal Inputs Serial Digital
1 x Equalized SDI
Standards
SMPTE 259M-C-1997
Reference Input
Composite or black burst
Signal Outputs Analog
Up to 5 x Composite encoded
Standards
PAL/NTSC/SECAM
SDI
Up to 2 x Re-clocked SDI
Standards
SMPTE 259M-C-1997
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
www.snellwilcox.com
IQDMENCS PAL/NTSC/SECAM Encoder with Synchronizer - 10 bit Card Edge & RollCall Functions Card Edge Controls (also available via RollCall)
Power Supplies OK
Standard
PAL/NTSC/SECAM
No Input
Test pattern select
Black, Color bars or Mute
No Reference
VITS Insert
On/Off
EDH
Present : error second : error hour
Vertical Data
Pass/Strip
ScH Error
Reference ScH error Flashes for
Genlock Mode
Internal (Min Delay) lock/ Zero ScH
synchronizer delay of > 1 ms
Lock Genlock H-Phase offset
±1.9 lines
Genlock SC Phase Offset
360°
Functions Available via RollCall Only
EDH Monitor
Reset Statistics
RollTrack Compatible
SECAM Notch
On/Off
EDH Monitor
Show/Reset Statistics
SECAM Bottles
On/Off
Logging
Input change/EDHScH Error
SECAM Carrier
On/Off
SECAM Pre-Filter
On/Off
Preset Unit
On
Indicators
Features & Specification Signal Inputs
Power Consumption
Serial Input Return Loss
Better than -15 dB to 270 MHz
Reference Input Standard
525/625 (same standard as D1 input)
Module Power Consumption 6.9 W max
Color Standard PAL/NTSC/SECAM Composite or Black Burst
Standard level ±3 dB
EMC Performance Information Environment
Reference Input Level
Commercial and light industrial E2 Peak Mains Inrush Current following a 5 second mains interruption No mains input
Signal Outputs Composite Encoding
10-bit
Y Frequency Response
5.5 MHz ±0.05 dB
U/I & V/Q Frequency
Less than -3 dB at 1.3 MHz
Response
Less than 20 dB at 4.0 MHz
Differential Gain
Better than 0.2%
Differential Phase
Better than 0.2°
ScH Phase
0° ±2°
Performance Information
No performance degradations or cable length limitations
Composite Output Return Loss Better than 35 dB to 5.8 MHz Serial Output Return Loss
Better than -15 dB to 270 MHz
Delay (minimum delay mode) Less than 3 µs
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
www.snellwilcox.com
IQMDA00 HD/SD-SDI Monitoring Distribution Amplifier The IQMDA00 is an HD/SD-SDI distribution amplifier and HD-SDI monitoring downconverter. This module takes HD-SDI streams and produces four re-clocked HD-SDI outputs. It also converts the input signal to same framerate SD-SDI outputs for monitoring. Output options include 4 x HD-SDI and 3 x SD-SDI. One group of audio can also be carried through from the HD inputs to the SD outputs. This module can also be used to distribute SD-SDI signals to SMPTE 259M-C, providing 7 outputs from one input.
Does this module suit your application?
•
•
An HD-SDI monitoring down-converter to allow compact low-cost, low-power monitoring solutions for HD environments
•
Why should you choose this module?
•
Extremely compact solution for downconversion of HD picture sources for monitoring on SD equipment with embedded audio
•
Allows low cost SD video monitors with SDI inputs to be used to monitor HD signals
Standards supported:
-
HD-SDI to SMPTE292M
RollCall remote control and monitoring compatible
SD-SDI to SMPTE259M-C
•
A distribution amplifier for HD-SDI signals with SD-SDI monitoring capability
•
Allows HD sources to be recorded on SD recording equipment for monitoring or viewing at a future time
•
A distribution amplifier for SD-SDI signals with 7 x SD-SDI outputs
•
•
Audio capability means that a complete Audio/Video monitoring solution is possible
Combined audio and video support means that SD monitoring systems can be used for HD feeds including their audio content
•
•
Supports one output group of embedded audio channels with input audio group selection
SD/HD input flexibility allows distribution of SD-SDI signals or distribution and downconversion of HD-SDI signals without the need for separate hardware
•
Monitoring output aspect ratio may be set to letterbox, anamorphic or center cut out picture modes
•
Will pass SD signals to allow monitoring of either HD or SD signals fed via a single connector
• •
Signal loss detection Maintains the input frame-rate for the output signal
Order codes for IQH3A enclosures
IQMDA0026-1A HD/SD-SDI DA and HD-SDI Monitoring Downconverter. 1 HD/SD-SDI input, 4 HD/SD-SDI and 3 SD-SDI outputs For more details on enclosure types please refer to the Frames/Enclosures section
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
www.snellwilcox.com
IQMDA00 HD/SD-SDI Monitoring Distribution Amplifier Signal Inputs & Outputs Signal Inputs Electrical
1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C
Connector/Format
BNC, 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Input Cable Length
Up to 140 m Belden 1694A @ 1.5 Gbit/s Up to 350 m Belden 1694A @ 270 Mbit/s
Return loss
> -15dB
Signal Outputs Distribution Outputs Electrical
1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C
Connector/Format
BNC, 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Outputs
4
Return loss
> -15dB
Downconverter Outputs Electrical
270 Mb/s SD-SDI SMPTE 259M-C including one group of embedded audio
Connector/Format
BNC, 75ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Outputs
3
Output Return Loss
> -15dB
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
www.snellwilcox.com
IQMDA00 HD/SD-SDI Monitoring Distribution Amplifier Card Edge & RollCall Functions User Memories
Indicators Power
OK
Input audio group selection
CPU
OK
Output audio group selection
Status
OK(Green)
Reporting
Warning(Yellow) Error(Red)
16 x Save / Recall / Rename
Input format(including unknown), input loss, CRC error
Logging
Input Status Input Standard Convert
Available Conversions
CRC/EDH
Input
Output
1125(1080)/29.97i or sF
525(483)/29.97i
1125(1080)/25i or sF
625(576)/25i
750(720)/59.94P
525(483)/29.97i
750(720)/50P
625(576)/25i
SD Output Video Delay
625(576)/25i
625(576)/25i
Input Present
525(483)/29.97i
525(483)/29.97i
Input Loss
CRC/EDH total RollTrack Controls
On/Off, Index, Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending
RollTrack Outputs
Unused
RollCall Control Control
SD Output standard (including auto)
Aspect ratio for monitoring
letterbox, anamorphic, center cut out
outputs
Features & Specification Specifications
(anamorphic)
attenuation
Vertical Response
> 40 dB stop band attenuation
Processing
10 bit
Under/over shoot
65dB
Power Consumption
Colour Space
Transmission matrix conversion from
Module Power Consumption 8.5 W Max
SMPTE274 to ITUR-601 Y/C delay
< 10ns
Delay
2 fields (interlace inputs), 2 Frames progressive inputs)
Horizontal Response
© Snell & Wilcox 2005
±0.2dB to 5.4MHz, > 45dB stop band
www.snellwilcox.com
IQMUX42 – 49
C
HD/SD – SDI 10/16 Channel AES/EBU Remultimplexer with Audio Processing
Hyperion, Snell & Wilcox, IQ Modular, and RollCall are all trademarks of Snell Ltd. Dolby E and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are duly acknowledged. .
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Contents Module Description ................................................................................................................. 4 Rear Panel Views..................................................................................................................... 6 Enclosures ............................................................................................................................... 7 Module Versions ...................................................................................................................... 8 Features.................................................................................................................................... 9 Technical Profile .................................................................................................................... 10 Connections ........................................................................................................................... 13 Input Connections ................................................................................................................ 13 Serial In ............................................................................................................................ 13 AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX42/46) ........................................................................ 13 AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX43/47) ........................................................................ 13 AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX44/48)............................................................................. 13 AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX45/49)............................................................................. 14 Output Connections ............................................................................................................. 14 Serial Digital Video Outputs ............................................................................................. 14 AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX42/46) ........................................................................ 14 AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX43/47) ........................................................................ 14 AES MON OUT (IQMUX 43/45/47/48 only) ..................................................................... 15 AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX44/48)............................................................................. 15 AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX45/49)............................................................................. 15 25 WAY D-Type Connection Details.................................................................................... 16 Example of Connection to XLR Connectors ........................................................................ 17 Card Edge Indicators ............................................................................................................ 18 Controlling the IQMUX from the RollCall Control Panel.................................................... 19 The Information Window ...................................................................................................... 19 Video Input Settings............................................................................................................. 21 Specifying Valid Input Standards ..................................................................................... 21 Specifying Input Loss Conditions ..................................................................................... 21 Viewing CRC and EDH Errors.......................................................................................... 22 Video Output Settings .......................................................................................................... 22 Specifying the Video Output Standard ............................................................................. 22 Specifying a Test Pattern ................................................................................................. 23 Specifying the Video Output............................................................................................. 24 Adjusting Gain and Black Levels...................................................................................... 24 Controlling Monochrome Functions ................................................................................. 24 Force Freezing the Picture ............................................................................................... 24 Audio Processing Overview ................................................................................................. 25 Audio Processing Block Diagram......................................................................................... 25 Audio Processing Block Diagram (showing Control Panel Screens)................................... 26 SDI Demultiplexer ................................................................................................................ 27 AES Processing ................................................................................................................... 27 Audio Delay Processor ........................................................................................................ 28 Synchronizing SRCs ............................................................................................................ 28 Tone Generator.................................................................................................................... 29 Mixers 1 to 4......................................................................................................................... 29 Embedder ProcAmps........................................................................................................... 30 SDI TX.................................................................................................................................. 30 AES ProcAmps .................................................................................................................... 30 AES TX/RXs......................................................................................................................... 31 AES Monitor ......................................................................................................................... 31 Dolby E Audio Handling ....................................................................................................... 31 AES Output ProcAmp Settings ............................................................................................ 33 Controlling AES Output .................................................................................................... 33 Embedded ProcAmp Group Settings................................................................................... 34
Page 1
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Adjusting Embedded Audio Settings................................................................................ 34 Audio Mixer Settings ............................................................................................................ 34 Adjusting Audio Mix.......................................................................................................... 35 Changing a Mixer Name................................................................................................... 36 Clip Indicators................................................................................................................... 36 AES Routing Settings .......................................................................................................... 37 Specifying AES Routing ................................................................................................... 37 Monitor Routing Settings (MUX43/45/47/49 only) ............................................................... 38 Specifying Monitor Routing .............................................................................................. 38 Embedded Routing Groups Settings ................................................................................... 39 Specifying Signal Sources................................................................................................ 39 Video Delay/DolbyE (IQMUX42-45) .................................................................................... 40 Video Delay/DolbyE Auto Line (IQMUX46-49) .................................................................... 41 Video Delay Modes .......................................................................................................... 41 Minimum Audio................................................................................................................. 42 Frames ............................................................................................................................. 42 Manual H and V................................................................................................................ 42 Manual MS ....................................................................................................................... 43 Dolby E Auto Line (IQMUX46-49 Only)............................................................................ 44 Dolby E Timing ................................................................................................................. 45 Audio Delay Settings............................................................................................................ 47 Audio Delay Select-A/B .................................................................................................... 49 RollTrack .......................................................................................................................... 49 Total Delay ....................................................................................................................... 50 Smooth Delay Limit .......................................................................................................... 50 AES Delay 1 to 8 and Embed Delay 1 to 8 ...................................................................... 50 Embed On/Off Settings ........................................................................................................ 52 Embedder Priority............................................................................................................. 52 Group/Channel Active ...................................................................................................... 52 Embedded I/P Setup............................................................................................................ 54 PCM.................................................................................................................................. 54 Data .................................................................................................................................. 55 Mixed ................................................................................................................................ 55 Embedded Audio Input Names ........................................................................................ 55 Embedded O/P Setup .......................................................................................................... 56 Setting up Embedded Output ........................................................................................... 56 HANC and VBI Blanking Settings ........................................................................................ 57 Specifying Vertical Interval Data (VBI) Blanking Settings ................................................ 57 Specifying Horizontal Ancillary Data (HANC) Blanking Settings...................................... 58 AES I/O Setup...................................................................................................................... 59 PCM.................................................................................................................................. 61 Data .................................................................................................................................. 61 Mixed ................................................................................................................................ 61 RollTrack Settings................................................................................................................ 62 RollTrack Sources ............................................................................................................ 62 RollTrack Addresses ........................................................................................................ 62 RollTrack Commands....................................................................................................... 63 Using RollTracks .............................................................................................................. 63 Viewing RollTrack Information.......................................................................................... 63 Memory Settings .................................................................................................................. 64 Saving to Memory ............................................................................................................ 64 Recalling Memory............................................................................................................. 65 Logging................................................................................................................................... 66 RollCall Log Fields ........................................................................................................... 72 The Setup Screen ................................................................................................................ 74 Diagnostics........................................................................................................................... 75 Diagnostic Test Descriptions............................................................................................ 75 Running Diagnostic Tests ................................................................................................ 75 Operation from an Active Control Panel ............................................................................. 76
Page 2
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
RollCall Commands............................................................................................................... 77 RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking ........................................................................................ 139 Dolby-E ................................................................................................................................. 145 What is Dolby E? ............................................................................................................... 145 Dolby E and Metadata ....................................................................................................... 145 Dolby E Partner Program................................................................................................... 145 16 and 20-bit Dolby E ........................................................................................................ 145 Dolby Digital and AC3 ......................................................................................................... 146 Metadata ............................................................................................................................ 146 Ancillary Passing and Audio Embedding ......................................................................... 147 Manual Revision Record..................................................................................................... 149
Page 3
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Module Description The IQMUX42-49 family of modules provides a highly flexible solution for all HD-SDI 1.5 Gbit/s or SD-SDI 270 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing operations. Handling up to 16 audio channels (eight AES/EBU streams) makes them ideal for both multi-lingual and discrete surround sound applications. Fully compatible with Dolby E compressed audio the IQMUX4649 includes a ‘Dolby E mode’ for automatic synchronization to the video frame boundary, whether already embedded in the incoming SDI or on discrete AES inputs. Additional audio processing features include tracking audio delay, gain, phase invert, channel level routing, and audio mixing. Video features include proc. amp controls, HANC/VANC blanking and up to 12 frames of delay.
1
SDI RX & Equalization
Signal loss & CRC detection
Demux
Presence, CRC and Standards Detection
Video Delay
1
Selective Ancillary Blanking
Multiplexer
SDI TX
AES Monitor
Dolby E Auto Alignment 8 Delay Processors for AES Signals
AES Router Pairs 1-8
Proc Amp
Proc Amp
Proc Amp
Synchronizing Sample Rate Converters
Tone Tone Generator Generator
8
Channel Router
Proc Amp
1 Built-in Intelligence
1
8 Assignable Assignable Audio Assignable Audio Assignable Mixers Audio Mixers Audio Mixers Mixers
1 8
AES TX
Out
AES RX
In
1-8
1-8
AES TX
Out
AES RX
In
Network intelligence, control and monitoring
The sophisticated audio processing features include comprehensive audio delays, gain control, phase inversion and mixing. Both AES input pair routing and separate channel level routing are included. The module is fully Dolby E™ compatible and can handle other non-PCM audio streams including Dolby AC3 (Dolby Digital) passed as AES data. The module has 16 channels of standard AES I/O and also provides an additional pair (one AES stream) for monitoring or other basic output functions providing a total of 18 channels of audio access on one module. Unlike other audio processing modules these units also have dedicated video control features that include video ProcAmp controls and up to 12 frames of video delay. This allows the IQMUX42-49 to be employed as the prime control unit in a processing chain providing all audio and video controls required to prepare signals. Video capabilities extend to a large 12-frame video delay that can work in conjunction with the sophisticated delay features available for the audio channels. Delay can be inserted in the video path to compensate for audio
Page 4
1-8
I/O
Inputs
Dolby E Auto Alignment
Outputs
AES TX
8 Delay Processors for Embedded Signals
2
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
processing. It can also be inserted in the audio path to compensate for video processing. It can be inserted in both to simply re-time the complete signal. The audio delays can be both fixed and can track video synchronizers to keep sound in perfect sync with the pictures. The audio delay capability can be used for non PCM audio so that Dolby E sources can be delayed either to match the video or to re-time the Dolby blocks to realign with the video frames if necessary. Also as the AES signals can be both input and output at the same time this means that these audio delay features like the other audio capabilities can be used in an AES to AES role as well as when embedding or de-embedding. Dolby E and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
Page 5
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Rear Panel Views IQMUX42/46 3
1
5
2
SERIAL IN
1 2
4
IQMUX4 _26-1A
AES IN / OUT
SERIAL OUT
IQMUX43/47 8 AES MON OUT
6 7
1
3
5
2
SERIAL IN
1 2
4
IQMUX4 _29-2A
SERIAL OUT
AES IN / OUT
6
BYPASS
1
AES MON OUT
8 7
2 SERIAL OUT
SERIAL IN 1
3 2
5 4
IQMUX4 _40-2A
AES IN / OUT
IQMUX44/48 SERIAL IN
1
IQMUX4_ 31-1A
2 SERIAL OUT
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
IQMUX45/49 SERIAL IN IQMUX45 31-1A
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
AES MON OUT
Page 6
1 2 SERIAL OUT
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Module Versions The following versions of this module are available: IQMUX4226-1A HD/SD-SDI 10 Channel Remultiplexer: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 5 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs IQMUX4329-2A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES monitor output
IQMUX4340-2A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer with relay input bypass: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES monitor output The relay bypass exists between the Serial Input and Output 2 only. In the event of module removal, power failure, or certain types of module failure, the signal from Serial In to Output 2 will be able to bypass the module.
IQMUX4431-1A
HD/SD-SDI 10 Channel Remultiplexer: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 5 AES/EBU balanced inputs/outputs
IQMUX4531-1A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU balanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES/EBU unbalanced monitor output
IQMUX4626-1A
HD/SD-SDI 10 Channel Remultiplexer with Dolby E Handling. • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 5 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs.
IQMUX4729-2A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer with Dolby E Handling. • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES monitor output.
IQMUX4740-2A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer with relay input bypass: • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU unbalanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES monitor output. The relay bypass exists between the Serial Input and Output 2 only. In the event of module removal, power failure, or certain types of module failure, the signal from Serial In to Output 2 will be able to bypass the module.
IQMUX4831-1A
HD/SD-SDI 10 Channel Remultiplexer with Dolby E Handling. • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 5 AES/EBU balanced inputs/outputs
IQMUX4931-1A
HD/SD-SDI 16 Channel Remultiplexer with Dolby E Handling. • 2 HD/SD-SDI outputs • 8 AES/EBU balanced inputs/outputs • 1 AES/EBU unbalanced monitor output.
Page 8
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Features •
Multiplex unbalanced or balanced AES audio onto HD/SD-SDI video streams with channel-level control
•
Demultiplex existing audio channels and output them to unbalanced or balanced AES
•
Dolby E support – pair routing and automatic re-alignment and synchronization to the video frame boundary
•
Standards supported:
•
HD-SDI to SMPTE292M/274M/296M
•
SD-SDI to SMPTE259M-C
•
Capable of processing up to 16 input audio channels to 24-bits at rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz both synchronous and asynchronous to the video stream
•
Channel-level control allows up to 16 individual embedded audio channels to be swapped-over or swapped out
•
4 off 4 channel assignable audio mixers
•
Audio proc-amp and delay
•
2 independent audio delay controls including selectable fixed delay and tracking delays for each (either selectable for any pair)
•
Tracking audio delay that tracks the video delay or external RollTrack inputs
•
Any group of embedded audio may be passed unchanged
•
Video delay feature, up to 12 frames
•
Video controls including video gain and offset
•
Input SDI, CRC, EDH and ANC data checking and reporting
•
Independent horizontal and vertical ancillary data blanking
•
In-built test pattern generator
•
Input loss detection – input pass through or black/pattern/freeze
•
16 x user memories
•
Naming for audio input, mixer and output channels for easy identification
•
Why should you choose this module?
•
Suitable for synchronous or asynchronous multiplexing and demultiplexing HD/SD-SDI applications using AES audio
•
Ideal for handling Dolby E compressed audio applications as advanced Dolby E alignment functions enable accurate timing to be maintained throughout the signal path
•
Suitable for multi-lingual audio applications thanks to channel-level control and up to sixteen channel operation
Page 9
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Technical Profile Inputs & Ouputs
IQMUX44/45/47/48 Balanced AES/EBU
Video Signal Inputs
AES Audio .......................... 5/8 balanced
Digital Video........................1 x Serial Digital Input
Connector / Format ............ 25 Way D-Type / 110 ohm panel mounted
Electrical ............................1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C Connector / Format .............BNC/ 75 ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel Input Cable Length..............Up to 140 m Belden 1694A @ 1.5 Gbit/s Up to 350 m Belden 1694A @ 270 Mbit/s Return loss..........................> -15 dB
Video Signal Outputs Digital Video........................2 x Serial Digital Outputs Electrical ............................1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M 270 Mbit/s SDI, SMPTE 259M-C Connector / Format .............BNC/ 75 ohm panel jack on standard S&W connector panel
Audio Signal Inputs/Outputs (software selectable) IQMUX42/43/46/47 Unbalanced AES/EBU AES Audio...........................5/8 Unbalanced AES Audio Monitor Output..1 Unbalanced (IQMUX43/47 only) Connector / Format .............BNC/ 75 ohm panel jack
AES Audio Monitor Output . 1 Unbalanced (IQMUX45/49 only) Connector / Format ............ BNC/ 75 ohm panel jack Resolution .......................... Inputs: 32 kHz/ 44.1 kHz/48 kHz synchronous or asynchronous to video stream. Outputs: 48kHz synchronous to the video stream. Up to 24-bit, (20 MSBs embedded in SDSDI stream). Audio Delay ........................ Minimum: 0.75 ms for data signals and embedded input pairs; 3 ms for AES pairs Maximum 2.5 s
Controls Indicators Power ................................. OK (Green) CPU.................................... OK (Green flashing) FPGA.................................. OK (Orange flashing) Status ................................. OK (Green) Warning (Orange) Error (Red) Lock.................................... OK (Green) SDI Error ............................ Error (Red)
Resolution ...........................Inputs: 32 kHz/ 44.1 kHz/48 kHz synchronous or asynchronous to video stream. Outputs: 48kHz synchronous to the video stream. Up to 24-bit, (20 MSBs embedded in SDSDI stream). Audio Delay.........................Minimum: 0.75 ms for data signals and embedded input pairs; 3 ms for AES pairs Maximum 2.5 s
Page 10
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
RollCall Features Audio Controls
Tone Setup:
Embedded Audio Types......PCM (to AES3)/ Data (SMPTE 337M inc. Dolby E)/ Mixed (Passes any channel status information present)
Frequency .......................... 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, mute @ –20 dBFS or – 18 dBFS
Video Controls Output Standard ................. Select, Follow Input
Channel routing ..................Output channels routed from AES inputs 1 to 8, SDI 16 embedded channels from any group, test tone and silence Embedder Priority ...............Normal distribution/Audio Prioritized Embedded Group................Pass/Blank/Embed Channel Status handling and checking Dolby E Auto Line selection Define Dolby E embed line for each video standard Output side control proc. - gain and polarity Independent Gain, Mute, & Polarity control over embedded output channels. +12 dB to -66 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Channel 1 Delay sources Coarse Manual delay 1 & 2.Up to +2 s in 0.25 ms steps, common to any selected pairs. Fine Manual delay 1 & 2 .....Up to ±0.25 ms in 5 μs steps, common to any selected pairs. Smooth Delay Limit.............0ms to 80ms. Dolby E delay (alignment)...Auto/Manual Variable audio delay control source Up to 0.5 s from RollTrack + Video Delay
Channel 2 Delay sources Coarse Manual delay 1 & 2.Up to +2 s in 0.25 ms steps, common to any selected pairs.
Standards List .................... Select video standards for automatic follow Black Level ......................... ±200 mV in steps of 1 mV Master Video Gain ............. ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Y Gain ................................ ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Cb/Cr Gain ......................... ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Pattern Select..................... 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars SMPTE Bars, Tartan Bars, Pluge Ramp, H Sweep, Pulse & Bar, Burst Blank Ancillary Data ........... Blank All, Blank HANC, Pass All, Pass when Output Standard equals Input Standard VBI Line Blank.................... Individual lines for each video standard Manual Freeze ................... On/Off Freeze ................................ Field/Frame Video Channel Control ....... Y On/Off, C On/Off Default Video Output .......... Pattern / freeze/ black / run through
Other Controls User Memories ................... 16 x Save / Recall / Rename Input/Output Names ........... User configurable naming of the input and output AES/EBU, embedded audio and mixer channels
Fine Manual delay 1 & 2 .....Up to ±0.25 ms in 5 μs steps, common to any selected pairs. Smooth Delay Limit.............0ms to 80ms. Dolby E delay (alignment)...Auto/Manual Variable audio delay control source Up to 0.5 s from RollTrack + Video Delay Channel Status handling and checking
Page 11
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
RollCall Features
Embedded audio handling . HD - 24-bit synchronous 48 kHz to SMPTE 299M SD - 20-bit synchronous 48 kHz to SMPTE 272MA
Logging ...............................Video Status Emb(edded) Audio Status O/P Audio Status O/P Audio Level Status O/P Dolby E Status AES Input Status AES Output Status Embedded audio output status, level & type (pairs 1-8) Embedded Dolby E output timing status (pairs 1-8) Misc
Power Consumption Module Power Consumption 11.2 W Max
RollTrack Controls ..............Source, Address, Command, Status, Sending. RollTrack Sources...............Unused, Video Delay, Input Present, Input Loss, Output Freeze, Output Unfreeze, Embedded Audio (Pairs 1-8) AES Audio (Pairs 1-8), Output:1080, Output:720, Output:576(625), Output:480(525)
Specifications Video Standards 750(720)/60p, 1125(1080)/30i 750(720)/59p, 1125(1080)/30sF 750(720)/50p, 1125(1080)/29i 1125(1080)/30p, 1125(1080)/29sF 1125(1080)/29p, 1125(1080)/25i 1125(1080)/25p, 1125(1080)/25sF 1125(1080)/24p, 1125(1080)/24sF 1125(1080)/23p, 1125(1080)/23sF 1125(1035)/30i 1125(1035)/29i 525(480)/29i, 625(576)/25i Horizontal Timing ................0 to 1 output line in steps of 1 pixel. Delay Adjustment................Horizontal and Vertical timing Vertical Timing ....................0 to 1 output frame in steps of 1 line. Minimum Delay ...................HD – 15 μs SD – 42 μs Video Delay.........................HD - 1120 pixels to 11 Frames + 820 pixels SD - 570 pixels to 11 Frames + 420 pixels Internal audio processing....32 channels @ 24-bit
Page 12
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Connections This section describes the physical input and output connections used by the IQMUX42-49 modules.
Input Connections Serial In Serial digital input connection to the module is made by means of a BNC connector, which terminates in 75 ohms. SERIAL IN
SERIAL IN
IQMUX42/43/46/47
IQMUX44/45/48/49
AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX42/46) Connections 1 to 5 can be configured as either AES unbalanced inputs or outputs. 3
1
5
2
4
AES IN / OUT
AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX43/47) Connectors 1 to 8 can be configured as either AES unbalanced inputs or outputs. The AES MON OUT (monitor) connector is always configured as an output. 6 7
1
3 2
5
SERIAL IN
8 AES MON OUT
1 2
4
AES IN / OUT
SERIAL OUT
AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX44/48) All five AES input/output connections are made via a 25-way D type connector. They may be configured as either AES balanced inputs or outputs. For connection details please see page 16.
IQMUX4
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
Page 13
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX45/49) All eight AES input/output connections are made via a 25-way D type connector. They may be configured as either AES balanced inputs or outputs. For connection details please see page 16. The AES MON OUT (monitor) connector is always configured as an AES unbalanced output.
IQMUX4
AES MON OUT
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
Output Connections Serial Digital Video Outputs The unit has two serial digital video output connections, made by means of BNC connectors for 75 ohms. 1 2
SERIAL OUT
AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX42/46) Connections 1 to 5 can be configured as either AES unbalanced inputs or outputs. 3
1
5
2
4
AES IN / OUT
AES Unbalanced IN/OUT (IQMUX43/47) Connectors 1 to 8 can be configured as either AES unbalanced inputs or outputs. The AES MON OUT (monitor) connector is always configured as an output. 6 7
1
3 2
5
SERIAL IN
8 AES MON OUT
1 2
4
AES IN / OUT
Page 14
SERIAL OUT
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES MON OUT (IQMUX 43/45/47/48 only) This is an AES monitoring output via a BNC connector for 75 ohms. 8 AES MON OUT
AES MON OUT
AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX44/48) All five AES input/output connections are made via a 25-way D type connector. They may be configured as either AES balanced inputs or outputs. For connection details please see page 16.
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
AES Balanced IN/OUT (IQMUX45/49) All eight AES input/output connections are made via a 25-way D type connector. They may be configured as either AES balanced inputs or outputs. For connection details please see page 16. The AES MON OUT (monitor) connector is always configured as an AES unbalanced output.
AES MON OUT
AES AUDIO IN / OUT
Page 15
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
25 WAY D-Type Connection Details By Pin Number Pin No
Description
By Function Connection Pin No
Description
Connection
1
Chassis Ground
Ground
1
Chassis Ground
Ground
2
Channel 1 +
AES 1+
2
Channel 1 +
AES 1+
3
Channel 2 +
AES 2+
15
Channel 1 –
AES 1-
4
Ground (2)
Screen 2
14
Ground (1)
Screen 1
5
Channel 3 +
AES 3+
3
Channel 2 +
AES 2+
6
Channel 4 +
AES 4+
16
Channel 2 –
AES 2-
7
Ground (4)
Screen 4
4
Ground (2)
Screen 2
8
Channel 5 +
AES 5+
5
Channel 3 +
AES 3+
9
Channel 6 +
AES 6+
18
Channel 3 –
AES 3-
10
Ground (6)
Screen 6
17
Ground (3)
Screen 3
11
Channel 7 +
AES 7+
6
Channel 4 +
AES 4+
12
Channel 8 +
AES 8+
19
Channel 4 –
AES 4-
13
Ground (8)
Screen 8
7
Ground (4)
Screen 4
14
Ground (1)
Screen 1
8
Channel 5 +
AES 5+
15
Channel 1 –
AES 1-
21
Channel 5 –
AES 5-
16
Channel 2 –
AES 2-
20
Ground (5)
Screen 5
17
Ground (3)
Screen 3
9
Channel 6 +
AES 6+
18
Channel 3 –
AES 3-
22
Channel 6 –
AES 6-
19
Channel 4 –
AES 4-
10
Ground (6)
Screen 6
20
Ground (5)
Screen 5
11
Channel 7 +
AES 7+
21
Channel 5 –
AES 5-
24
Channel 7 –
AES 7-
22
Channel 6 –
AES 6-
23
Ground (7)
Screen 7
23
Ground (7)
Screen 7
12
Channel 8 +
AES 8+
24
Channel 7 –
AES 7-
25
Channel 8 –
AES 8-
25
Channel 8 –
AES 8-
13
Ground (8)
Screen 8
Page 16
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Example of Connection to XLR Connectors XLR Connectors MALE CONNECTOR (OUTPUTS) FEMALE CONNECTOR (INPUTS)
25 Way D-Connector
Note:
A line with a dot at the end (
) indicates a connection to the cable screen.
Page 17
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Card Edge Indicators + Power OK - Power OK CPU OK
OK Warning Error FPGA SDI Error Lock
The LEDs on the edge of the IQMUX42 - 49 indicate the operating status of the module. + Power OK (Green)
Indicates that a positive power supply is present.
- Power OK (Green)
Indicates that a negative power supply is present.
CPU OK (Green)
Indicates that the CPU is running.
FPGA (Orange)
Flashes when the FPGA has been loaded.
SDI Error (Red)
This will become illuminated if any CRC, EDH or TRS errors are detected on the SDI input. It is also illuminated when the input is lost.
Lock (Green)
This LED is continuously illuminated when the unit is locked to its input. When the input is lost and the default output is selected as Input, this LED is extinguished and the Warning LED will illuminate.
Error (Red)
Indicates that there is a board internal fault and a service is required.
Warning (Orange)
When illuminated, this will indicate that there is an operational problem that could affect the output picture. This could be: • Embedder Status - ANC overflow. The embedder has run out of ancillary space over quite a few lines. Due to heavy use of ancillary space on the video input, particularly in SD.
OK (Green)
•
Input Video - Incompatible input standard. Detected input standard is invalid.
•
Input Video - SDI problem. CRC or other SDI errors detected on selected input in the last whole field.
•
Reference - Lock Failure. Genlock failed to lock. Will generally become illuminated in transitional states like standard changes, but continuous illumination indicates a problem. More information is available in the status window.
Indicates that the module is operating correctly.
Page 18
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Controlling the IQMUX from the RollCall Control Panel The Information Window The information window appears in the upper-right corner of each screen and displays basic information about the audio and video status of the unit.
Select either Video Status or Audio Status to display the corresponding information. The following Video Status information is displayed: Line One Displays the status of the video input, followed by the standard of the input, or last valid signal. The unit is receiving a valid input signal of a recognized INP:OK standard. INP:LOST
The unit is not receiving an input signal.
INP:FAIL
The unit is receiving an input signal, but the signal is not valid. For example, the frame rate differs between the input and output standards.
MISM
The unit is receiving a valid input signal, but in a different format to the selected output standard. For example, in 1080/29i, out 1080/29p.
Line Two Displays the operating standard of the unit. The input signal standard is not recognized. Unknown The operating standard 1080/29i (For example) Line Three Displays the status of the ancillary data and the output picture, Ancillary present. ANC FRZ
Output frozen.
PAT
Output pattern.
MON
Monochrome.
HBL
Horizontal ancillary data is being blanked.
BLK
Output black.
Page 19
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
When Audio Status is selected, the status of the embedded audio input is displayed where: P
Indicates that the channel is a PCM audio input.
o
Indicates that the AES port is designated as an output.
Indicates that no audio input is detected
D
Indicates that the signal is data (non-pcm, Dolby, etc…)
CLIP
The word Clip will appear if any audio level reaches the 0dBFD point, i.e. the digital limit. The fader level should be reduced to prevent this occurring.
ANC FULL
Indicates the embedder / ancillary formatter has run out of ancillary space over quite a few lines and has thus lost data. Due to heavy use of ancillary space on the video input, particularly in SD.
Page 20
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Video Input Settings Use the settings on the Video Input screen to specify the: •
Input standards that the unit will accept as valid.
•
Condition that must exist in order for the unit to consider input to have been lost.
Additionally, this screen displays information about CRC/EDH.
Specifying Valid Input Standards The input signal standards to be considered valid are defined on this screen. To specify valid input standards: In the Valid Input Standards section, select the input standards that will be accepted as valid. To select all available standards, click Set All. To deselect all available standards, click Clear All. Note:
If any standards, other than those listed on this page are detected, they will be considered to be invalid.
Specifying Input Loss Conditions The module can be configured to take automatic action if the input signal is lost. The conditions that the module considers to be a loss of input are defined on this screen. To specify the condition that will be considered an input loss: In the Input Loss if section, select either: •
No Input: No input of any type is considered a loss of input.
•
In/Out std. Mismatch: Input signal not matching the output standard is considered a loss of input.
Page 21
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Viewing CRC and EDH Errors The Video Input screen also displays Cyclic Redundancy Checksum and Error Detection Handling errors. The following CRC and EDH Error information is displayed in the CRC/EDH Errors section: •
CRC/EDH Errors: Displays the number of CRC and EDH errors that have occurred since the last reset.
•
Time Since Last Error: Displays the time (in seconds) since the last CRC or EDH error was detected.
•
ANC Errors: This displays the number of ANC errors since the last reset.
To reset the error counts to zero, click Reset Counts. Time Since Reset displays the time since the error counts were last reset.
Video Output Settings Use the settings on the Video Output screen to: •
Specify the video output standard.
•
Set up the test pattern, if any, to be generated.
•
Specify the default output to be generated in response to a loss of input.
•
Adjust the signal gain and black levels.
•
Control the unit’s monochrome functions.
•
Control the unit’s picture freeze function.
Specifying the Video Output Standard There are two ways to specify the video output standard to be used by the unit. The video output can be set to follow the input, so that the output
Page 22
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
standard will always be the same as the input standard, or manually selected. When manually selected, the output standard will always be the one specified, regardless of the input signal. To allow the output standard to follow the input standard: In the Output Standard section, select Follows Input. To manually specify the output standard: 1. In the Output Standard section, select Manual Selection. 2. From the Output Standard list, select the output standard to be used. The available output standards are: 1125(1080)/30i
1125(1080)/25p
1125(1035)/29i
1125(1080)/30p
1125(1080)/25sf
750(720)/60p
1125(1080)/30sf
1125(1080)/24p
750(720)/59p
1125(1080)/29i
1125(1080)/24sf
750(720)/50p
1125(1080)/29p
1125(1080)/23p
525(480)/29i
1125(1080)/29sf
1125(1080)/23sf
625(576)/25i
1125(1080)/25i
1125(1035)/30i
Specifying a Test Pattern The Video Output screen also controls the test pattern. The test pattern options are to: •
Enable or disable the test pattern.
•
Use a horizontal scrolling test pattern.
•
Specify the test pattern to be used.
To enable or disable the test pattern: In the Test Pattern section: •
Select Enable to enable the test pattern function.
•
Clear Enable to disable the test pattern function.
To use a horizontal scrolling test pattern: In the Test Pattern section, select H-Scroll. When selected, the specified test pattern will scroll from left to right at a fixed rate. This mode is useful for differentiating between an input test pattern signal that has become a frozen picture (caused by loss of the input signal) and a test pattern that has been chosen as the output. To specify the test pattern to be used: From the Pattern Type list, select the pattern. The following pattern types are available: 100% Color Bars
75% Color Bars
SMPTE Bars
Tartan Bars
Pluge
Ramp
Sweep
Pulse & Bar
Burst
Page 23
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Specifying the Video Output The Default Output setting defines the output that the unit generates in response to a loss of video input as specified by the Input Loss If setting on the Video Input screen. To specify the default output: In the Default Output section, select one of the following: •
Freeze Frame: On loss of input, the output becomes a non-interpolated frozen frame picture. All HANC and VANC are blanked.
•
Freeze Field: On loss of input, the output becomes a frozen field one picture. All HANC and VANC are blanked.
•
Black: On loss of input, the picture cuts to black.
•
Input: The incoming signal will be displayed when ever possible.
•
Out Pattern: On loss of signal, the specified test pattern is displayed.
Adjusting Gain and Black Levels Use the ProcAmp functions to adjust the gain and black levels of the signal. To adjust the gain and black levels: In the ProcAmp section, adjust the following settings as required: •
Master Gain: Adjusts the overall gain (Y and Cb/Cr) over a range of ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. The preset value is 0.0 dB.
•
Y Gain: Adjusts the Y (luminance) gain over a range of ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. The preset value is 0.0 dB.
•
C Gain: Adjusts the Cb/Cr (color difference) gain over a range of ±6 dB in steps of 0.1 dB. The preset value is 0.0 dB. Note:
•
The total range of both Master + Y and Master + C controls is +6dB in steps of 0.1 dB. Preset value is 0dB.
Black Level: Adjusts the black level over a range of ±200 mV in steps of 1 mV. The preset value is 0 mV.
Controlling Monochrome Functions The unit can be set so that the output picture becomes monochrome using either the Y or Cb/Cr components of the signal. To output a monochrome signal: 1. In the Monochrome Section, select one of the following: • Y only: The output picture becomes monochrome using only the Y component of the signal. • C only: the output picture becomes monochrome using only the Cb/Cr component of the signal. 2. Select Enable.
Force Freezing the Picture The unit can impose a force freeze on the picture. When this is done, the output becomes a frozen frame or frozen field. To force freeze the output: 1. In the Freeze Type section select either • Frame: The picture becomes a frozen frame. • Field: The picture becomes a frozen field. 2. Select Force Freeze.
Page 24
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Audio Processing Overview Audio Processing Block Diagram Channel Router
Demux
Audio Delay Select B Manual RollTrack
Int Off
Eight Delay Control Channels for Embeded Signals
8 x AES Decoders
Decode
Pairs
Pairs
Decode
5 L&R 6 L&R
Delay 7
7 L&R
Delay 8
8 L&R
Delay 9
1 and 2
Delay 10
3 and 4
Delay 11
Decode Decode
Delay 6
Synchronizing SRCs
Decode
Inputs from AES I/O switches
Delay 5
4 L&R
Eight Delay Control Channels for AES Signals
Delay 12 Delay 13
SDI Out
AES TX
SDI
Video Delay Minimum Audio Frames Manual H and V, milliseconds
Audio Inputs
8 x 8 AES Router
Delay 4
SDI TX
3 L&R
Delayed Audio Outputs
SDI
Delay 3 Min A B
Multiplexer
2 L&R
Delayed Audio Outputs
Delay 2 Audio Delay Select A Manual RollTrack
ProcAmps 1 L&R
Delay 1
AES Monitor ProcAmps
AES TX’s/RX’s
1 L&R
Output
2 L&R
Output
3 L&R
Output
4 L&R
Output
5 L&R
Output
6 L&R
Output
7 L&R
Output
8 L&R
Output
Input
5 and 6 7 and 8
Input
9 and10
Decode
Delay 14
Decode
Delay 15
13 and 14
Decode
Delay 16
15 and 16
11 and 12
Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4
Page 25
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Inputs to AES Router
AES Inputs or Outputs
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Audio Processing Block Diagram (showing Control Panel Screens) Audio Delay
Channel Router
2 L&R
8 x 8 AES Router
8 x AES Decoders
Audio Input Pairs/Channels
Audio Delay Select B Manual RollTrack
Min A B
Int Off
Pairs
Pairs
5 L&R
7 L&R
Delay 8
8 L&R
Eight Delay Control Channels for AES Signals
Delay 9
1 and 2 3 and 4
Delay 12 Delay 13
SDI Out
AES TX
SDI
SDI
Delay 10 Delay 11
SDI TX
6 L&R
Delay 7
Synchronizing SRCs
Decode
Decode
Delay 6
4 L&R
Video Delay Minimum Audio Frames Manual H and V, milliseconds
Decode
Decode
Delay 5
3 L&R
Eight Delay Control Channels for Embeded Signals
Decode
Inputs from AES I/O switches
Delay 4
Delayed Audio Outputs
SDI
Delay 3
Delayed Audio Outputs
Delay 2 Audio Delay Select A Manual RollTrack
ProcAmps 1 L&R
Delay 1
Multiplexer
Demux
ProcAmps
AES TX’s/RX’s
AES Monitor
1 L&R
Output
2 L&R
Output
3 L&R
Output
4 L&R
Output
5 L&R
Output
6 L&R
Output
7 L&R
Output
8 L&R
Output
Input
5 and 6 7 and 8
Input
9 and10
Decode
Delay 14
Decode
Delay 15
13 and 14
Decode
Delay 16
15 and 16
11 and 12
Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4
Page 26
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Inputs to AES Router
AES Inputs or Outputs
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
SDI Demultiplexer The audio channels are demultiplexed from the SDI signal as eight 2-channel pairs that are feed to the audio delay processor. Note:
Note that embedded audio handling for HD is 24 bit synchronous 48 kHz to SMPTE 299 and SD is 20-bit synchronous 48 kHz to SMPTE 272M-A. Demux
SDI
AES Processing The AES ports may be configured as Inputs or Outputs. When a port is configured as an input the AES signal is passed to one of the inputs of the 8 x 8 AES router. The router allows any of the 8 input pairs to be selected to appear on any of the 8 outputs. The 8 pairs from the router are then fed to 8 decoders to produce eight 2 channel pairs.
Page 27
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Audio Delay Processor The SDI de-multiplexed and decoded AES signals (sixteen 2 channel pairs) are fed to sixteen separate delay blocks. Each block processes one audio pair (2 channels) at the same time, the delay time being the same for both channels. The delay time may be set to Min (the minimum audio delay of approx. 0.75 ms or 3.0 ms if via a SRC) or to a time set by one of two (A and B) Audio Delay Selectors. A delay equal to the unit’s video delay may also be added by selecting Int. The delay time set by each of these selectors is controlled by a combination of the following: Manual
A delay set by the Manual Delay control will be applied.
RollTrack
A delay set by external RollTrack commands will be applied. Delay 1 Delay 2
Audio Delay Select A Manual RollTrack
Delay 3 Min A B
Audio Delay Select B Manual RollTrack
Delay 4 Delay 5 Delay 6
Int Off
Delay 7
Eight Delay Control Channels for Embeded Signals
Delay 8
Synchronizing SRCs The outputs of delay blocks 1 to 8 (SDI de-multiplexed) are connected directly to inputs 1 to 16 of the channel router. The outputs of delay blocks 9 to 16 (Decoded AES) are passed through eight 2 channel synchronizing Sample Rate Converters to the inputs of the channel router. Synchronizing SRCs 1 and 2
Delay 10
3 and 4
Delay 11 Delay 12 Delay 13 Delay 14
Delayed Audio Outputs
Delay 9
5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and10 11 and 12
Delay 15
13 and 14
Delay 16
15 and 16
Page 28
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Tone Generator A tone generator provides the following signals to the channel router. •
1kHz at 20dBFS
•
2kHz at 20dBFS
•
4kHz at 20dBFS
•
1kHz at 18dBFS
•
2kHz at 18dBFS
•
4kHz at 18dBFS Note:
The frequency and level of these signals is not adjustable.
Mixers 1 to 4 There are four separate 4 input, 1 output audio mixers available. Each mixer has four inputs with individual gain controls that allow the mixing levels for each of the input signals, to be adjusted. The inputs may be any of the following: •
Mute
•
Disembed 1 to 8 Left/Right
•
AES Bus 1 to 8 Left/Right
•
Tone Generator outputs
Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4
Page 29
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedder ProcAmps There are eight 2 channel ProcAmps that receive their inputs from the output of the channel router. The two channels are processed as Left and Right with control of Gain, Inversion, Muting and a Stereo mode. The outputs are configured as eight 2 channel signals in four groups and these are fed to the Multiplexer where they are embedded onto the SDI signal. Channel Router
ProcAmps
Multiplexer
1 L&R 2 L&R 3 L&R 4 L&R 5 L&R 6 L&R 7 L&R 8 L&R
SDI
SDI TX The embedded SDI signal is fed to the output amplifier that provides two SDI outputs. SDI TX
SDI Out
AES ProcAmps There are eight 2 channel ProcAmps that receive their inputs from the output of the channel router. The two channels are processed as Left and Right with control of Gain, Inversion, Muting and a Stereo mode. ProcAmps 1 L&R
to 8 L&R
I
Page 30
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES TX/RXs There are eight AES transmitters and eight AES receivers. The AES ports may be configured as inputs or outputs by setting the Input/Output switch. When an AES Port is configured as an Output: •
The outputs from the AES ProcAmps are fed to the AES transmitter to provide an AES output.
When an AES Port is configured as an Input: •
The AES input signal is passed through an AES receiver and fed to an input of the AES router.
AES Monitor An AES monitoring output is provided on the IQMUX47 and the IQMUX49. This is an unprocessed signal derived from the output of the channel router. Signal selections are as follows: •
Mute
•
Disembed 1 to 8 Left/Right
•
Mixer 1 to 4 output
•
AES Bus 1 to 8 Left/Right
•
1kHz -20dBFS Tone
•
2kHz -20dBFS Tone
•
4kHz -20dBFS Tone
•
1kHz -18dBFS Tone
•
2kHz -18dBFS Tone
•
4kHz -18dBFS Tone
Dolby E Audio Handling This section describes how the IQMUX handles Dolby E audio. For a more general description of Dolby E and AC-3, see page 145. Dolby E and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. Dolby E audio achieves compatibility with a digital video stream by virtue of a few fundamental features:
Page 31
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
•
The compressed audio data is broken into frame-duration packets to match the video frames it will be embedded in.
•
Each frame is separated from neighboring frames by a guardband, which allows for clean video-type switching.
•
Concealment of switches is possible at a decoder, based on redundant audio and block counts in each frame.
However, there is a burden in dealing with a number of parallel frame-based carriers (such as Dolby E) alongside, and often within, the video. Namely: •
Each Dolby E stream, within an AES-3 / SMPTE-337 data pair, must be synchronous and aligned with the video to allow a video stream to be switched or recorded cleanly. Incorrect alignment can lead to muting, or even high amplitude noise bursts. As with SMPTE RP-168 switching, there is a small alignment tolerance. Upstream switched, or externally provided sources can present problematic deviations from the preferred Dolby E frame position.
•
Each video standard has its own specified Dolby E frame alignment point. Thus, a standards-agile broadcast environment must arrange for correct referencing and delay adjustment in each standard.
•
The embedding of audio within the video stream adds considerable timing uncertainy, and increases susceptibility to external factors such as loading of ancillary space and audio sample distribution produced by equipment in the video chain. In particular, standard definition is more prone to these issues than high definition.
The IQMUX is well equipped to deal with issues of carrying Dolby E audio within a broadcast environment. It has the tools required for the correct and easy handling of Dolby E in the following features: •
Transport enablers such as SMPTE-337 aware routing and channel status passing.
•
Monitoring and logging of Dolby E frame timing for both passed and newly-embedded audio.
•
Manual alignment facilities for consistently arranged environments.
•
Automatic realignment of Dolby E frames to preferred or non-standard positions.
For more information about the Dolby E controls, refer to the following sections: •
Embed On/Off on page 52.
•
Video Delay/Dolby E on page 41.
•
O/P Dolby E Logging on page 66.
Page 32
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES Output ProcAmp Settings Use the settings on the AES Output ProcAmps 1-4 and AES Output ProcAmps 5-8 screens to control the units AES audio output. The channels are grouped into eight output pairs. Note:
The ProcAmps are not available when the AES port is set as an input, or when the audio routed to that port is data. For both AES and embedded audio, the unit will either recognize the input as data only, or the input channels can be forced to act as data if they are data. The channels that have these inputs routed to their inputs will have their ProcAmp menus disabled.
For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25.
Controlling AES Output To adjust the AES output: For each pair in use, specify the following settings as required: •
Inv: Select this option to invert the signal polarity of the channel.
•
Mute: Select this option to mute the channel.
•
Stereo: Select this option to link the two channels in the pair together, as a stereo pair. Any adjustments made to one channel in the pair will be applied to the other.
•
Gain Controls: The gain controls adjust the gain of each channel, or stereo pair, over a range of +12 dB to -66 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The preset value is 0dB.
Page 33
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedded ProcAmp Group Settings The 16 embedded audio channels are arranged into four channel groups, of two channel pairs each. Use the settings on the Embedded ProcAmps Groups 1-2 and Embedded ProcAmps Groups 3-4 pages to adjust the gain, apply phase inversion, or mute any of the 16 embedded audio channels. Note:
These controls are not available when an output is defined as data, the input is data, or the audio embedder is disabled.
For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25.
Adjusting Embedded Audio Settings To adjust embedded audio settings: For each channel in use, specify the following settings as required: •
Inv: Select this option to invert the signal polarity.
•
Mute: Select this option to mute the channel.
•
Stereo: Select this option to link the two channels in the pair together, as a stereo pair. Any adjustments made to one channel in the pair will be applied to the other.
•
Gain Controls: The gain controls adjust the gain of each channel, or stereo pair, over a range of +12 dB to -66 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The preset value is 0dB.
Audio Mixer Settings The audio mixers create new, mixed audio feeds from the incoming channels. This is useful when, for example, incoming stereo feeds are required in mono, or discrete surround sound feeds are required in stereo.
Page 34
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Not only can the incoming feeds be mixed together, but the exact balance can be set using the faders. This allows finer control over the resulting sound than a simple mono function. Additional applications include mixing together incoming audio with local foreground, such as adding commentary to a sports feed. The invert function can be applied to a channel, to create a mix-minus channel for foldback. For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25. To access these settings, select Audio Mixer 1, Audio Mixer 2, Audio Mixer 3, or Audio Mixer 4 from the function list.
Adjusting Audio Mix Each of the four mixers has four inputs, with individual gain controls that allow the mixing level of each input signal to be adjusted. The settings for each mixer are the same, and as such, are only described once. To adjust the audio mix 1. From the Source lists, select an input source. Note:
If mute or one of the test tones is selected as the source, the corresponding gain control is disabled.
2. Adjust the mix as follows: • Inv: Select this option to invert the signal. • Mute: Select this option to mute the channel. • Gain Controls: The gain controls adjust the gain of each channel, or stereo pair, over a range of +12 dB to -66 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The preset value is 0dB.
Page 35
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Changing a Mixer Name •
To change the name of a mixer: Type the new mixer name and then click S.
•
To return to the default mixer name, click P.
Clip Indicators At the top of each fader the word Clip appears briefly if the audio level reaches the 0 dBFS point – reduce the fader level to prevent this from happening.
Page 36
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES Routing Settings The AES Routing 1-4 and AES Routing 5-8 screens select the signal sources for the eight AES outputs. For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25.
Specifying AES Routing For each channel within each pair, select the appropriate source. Select Link L+R to automatically pair a selected source with its corresponding left/right source, creating a stereo pair. This enables rapid selection in a stereo environment.
Page 37
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Monitor Routing Settings (MUX43/45/47/49 only) Use Monitor Routing to select the signal sources for the additional AES output on the MUX43/45/47/49. This output can be used as an extra feed or a monitoring feed. Mute and audio tones can also be selected. For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25.
Specifying Monitor Routing The procedure for specifying monitor routing is the same as for AES routing, described on the previous page.
Page 38
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedded Routing Groups Settings Use settings on the Embedded Routing Groups 1-2 and the Embedded Routing Groups 3-4 screens to specify the signal sources for the SDI embedder. As well, mute and audio tones can be selected. By default, there is a 1:1 relationship between the input source and the output. For example, channel one input is matched with channel one output, channel two input is matched with channel two output, and so on. For more information about how audio is processed by the module, refer to the Audio Processing Overview on page 25.
Specifying Signal Sources The settings for each source pair are the same, and as such, are only described once. To specify a signal source: For each source pair, select the required source; to configure the pair as stereo, select Link L+R. Note:
A corresponding left/right source will be automatically chosen when available. If a mixer output is selected as a source, a different mixer output will automatically be chosen for the other channel. Mix 1 and 2, or mix 3 and 4 are paired. If a tone is selected as the source, the same tone will automatically be chosen for the other channel. When an input pair is defined as data or mixed, an automatic pairing is established, similar to the Link L+R function. If either
Page 39
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
channel of a data pair is selected, the other half will automatically follow in the correct L+R order.
Video Delay/DolbyE (IQMUX42-45) For a complete description of these functions, refer to Video Delay/DolbyE Auto Line (IQMUX46-49), which describes all of the controls available on this page.
Page 40
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Video Delay/DolbyE Auto Line (IQMUX46-49) Use the Video Delay function to delay the video so that it is timed into the system, compensating for audio processing, or any other required delay. The delay can be defined in frames, lines and pixels, or in milliseconds. The total delay is cumulative, so that an accurate delay can be created. The total delay is displayed in the Internal Delay box in the Video Delay / Dolby E screen.
Video Delay Modes There are four methods by which video delay can be specified: •
Minimum Audio: Sets the video I/O delay to a nominal 3 ms.
•
Frames: Specifies the number of frames that the output signal will appear after the input signal.
•
Manual H and V: Delays the video by changing the horizontal and vertical timing.
•
Manual ms: Specifies the video delay in milliseconds (ms).
Internal Delay displays the total video delay applied. Note:
When embedded audio is set to Pass or respective groups are not active on the Embed On/Off screen, the timing of the video to embedded audio will not be affected.
Page 41
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Minimum Audio The Minimum Audio option effectively provides zero delay but when no internal delay is added, it is limited to the minimum audio delay of approx. 0.75 ms or 3 ms if via a SRC. This is a good choice when a simple mux or demux, or embedded audio shuffle is required because it allows the video and audio delays to be internally matched. When this option is selected all other timing controls become unavailable.
Frames The Frames delay mode specifies the number of frames that the output signal appears after the input signal. This is a good choice for a timed video chain because using a multiple of whole frames may avoid the need to place a synchronizer later in the chain, even if the video standard changes (within the same frame rate family). All values other than 0 frames allow delay matching in the audio processing. The range of adjustment is 0 to 11 frames in steps of 1 frame. The preset value is 1 frame.
Manual H and V The Manual H and V delay mode adjusts the video delay by changing the horizontal and vertical timing. When a delay is required to be defined in terms of video lines, for example, to round up to the next frame boundary, this method can be used. However, it can introduce complications on changes of video standard, and the minimum delay can go below the 0.75 ms (3 ms for AES PCM pairs) audio minimum delay, which would prevent audio delay matching. The range of adjustment for vertical timing is ±1 output frame – 1 line in steps of 1 line. The preset value for vertical timing is 0 lines. The range of adjustment for horizontal timing is ±1 output line – 1 pixel in steps of 1 pixel. The preset value for horizontal timing is 0 pixels. The total delay equals the sum of Delay Frames + Vertical Timing + Horizontal Timing. The sum of horizontal and vertical timing is post-limited to be under ± a frame of the current standard. The overall effect being allow a delay of 1 frame – 5 lines, for example, to align an earlier 5-line delay device into the next frame boundary. Note:
Horizontal and vertical timing can only be adjusted in the same direction. That is, either both positive, or both negative.
Page 42
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Manual MS The Manual ms delay mode specifies a delay in milliseconds. Use this method when a delay needs to be defined in terms of time, for example, to suit an audio or mixed interlace / progressive multi-standard environment. The overall effect is to allow a delay of 1 frame – 3 ms, to align an earlier 3 ms delay device to the next frame boundary. When a Manual ms delay is used, the Vertical Timing and Horizontal Timing controls become unavailable. However, the Delay Frames adjustment can still be used. The total delay equals the sum of delay frame + the millisecond value specified. Note:
The Horizontal Timing and Vertical Timing, even though they are disabled, will report this value in lines and pixels.
Page 43
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Dolby E Auto Line (IQMUX46-49 Only) Use the settings in the Dolby E Auto Line section to specify a video line for Dolby E header alignment. For any pair with Auto DE enabled, the audio delay will attempt to align the output audio guardband on this video line, while keeping the delay within ±0.5 frame of nominal. Each video standard may have its own line specified, so that a change of standard will automatically call up the appropriate line for alignment to.
Line for Standard / Dolby E Auto Line No This allows access for defining and viewing the table of user specified lines for Dolby E auto alignment, status reporting and logging. Defaults for each standard are the published 525/29i and 625/25i positions mapped onto the supported standards, i.e. assuming the encoders / decoders are referenced to SD. From the Line for Standard list, select the input video standard, this will automatically adjust the Dolby E Auto Line No, which can also be manually adjusted by means of the slider bar. The default Dolby E line numbers for the supported video standards are shown in the following table. Line for Standard
Dolby E Auto Line No
Line for Standard
Dolby E Auto Line No
1125(1080)/29i
22
1125(1035)/29i
22
1125(1080)/29p
22
525(480)/29i
14
1125(1080)/29sf
22
625(576)/25i
11
1125(1080)/25i
20
1125(1080)/25p
20
1125(1080)/25sf
20
Use Embedded Reader This option allows the automatic Dolby E alignment adjustment to be made using the actual embedded data to improve the accuracy of the correction, and ensure the requested line is achieved. If Use Embedded Reader is not enabled, the correction is applied at the audio delay output, before the embedder and, as such, may not be as accurate. It is enabled by default.
Page 44
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Dolby E Timing An indication of Dolby E header phasing at the outputs helps in making corrections and avoids clicking or other corruption on downstream switching due to the 5% inter-frame guardband being misaligned with the video switch point. Each of the eight output embedded pairs, including passed input audio groups, can be selected for display and logging. The display will report (for both the standard and the userdefined line) a line offset or indicate a missing Dolby E header, for example, indicating PCM audio. Use the Audio Pair slider bar to select one of the eight embedded audio pairs. Line Number reports the actual line number on which the Dolby E header occurs. Note that, depending on audio packet distribution, this may differ slightly from the expected line number. For example, if the expected line number is 22, line 21 or 23 may periodically be reported. This is a normal occurrence and does not necessarily indicate an error condition. Sample Number reports the current audio sample number. Relative Timing (IQMUX46-49 Only) Dolby E position is reported Early, Late, or OK within the limits for each output standard as shown below. ‘Frame ?’ is reported if the video frame rate is at twice the audio frame rate. In this situation, the audio aligns to the nearest video frame. Since the number of video frames will be double the number of audio frames, the audio delay may require adjustment in order to align with the correct video frame. There are two levels of limits for status and logging. For safe and reliable operation, the OK limit is ± 3 samples from the specified point, with WARN indications for up to the table limits, and ERROR indications beyond (this will definitely cause packet corruption on switching). Standard
Switch Point
Early Line
Normal Line
Late Line
625/25i
6
30
525/29.97i
10
29
1080/25i 1080/25sf 1080/25p
7
55
1080/29.97i 1080/29.97sf 1080/29.97p 1035/29.97i
7
55
720/50p
7
73
720/59.94p
7
73
Page 45
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Note:
All HD standards use line 7 for the frame switching line. Unsupported frame rates are: 23.98, 24, 30, 60 in i or p or sf types
User Dolby-E Line (IQMUX46-49 Only) If the Dolby E delay has been manually configured, select User next to corresponding audio pairs to specify which of the eight audio pairs will monitor the user line for status and logging. Alternatively, select Standard to monitor the standard Dolby E line.
Page 46
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Audio Delay Settings The IQMUX42 - 49 audio delay control system comprises 16 separate delay blocks. Each block processes a pair of PCM audio channels or one non-PCM data feed. The delay blocks can be controlled by one of two composite control feeds for external adjustment, or by an internal matching delay option. Each control feed can be driven by combination of both tracking and fixed delays. Tracking delays are those that can follow a variable timing value, such as the delay through a video synchronizer. The selection of audio delay control A or B allows audio to be timed to, or synchronized with, one of two separate timing planes. Delays can be configured such that: •
A minimum of delay is applied.
•
All audio is delayed together.
•
Some audio is delayed, while some is not.
•
Audio pairs have differing amounts of delay applied.
The delays are SMPTE-337 data aware, and as such will attempt to track any changes during the guardbands to avoid corrupting any data packets. This limits response to changes to a rate similar to the SRC filtered case, which is entirely adequate for tracking while synchronizing video. For each delay block then the delay can be derived from one of the following settings: Min
Effectively zero delay but when no Internal delay is added it is limited to the minimum audio delay of approx. 0.75 ms or 3 ms if via a SRC.
A
The delay time for this audio pair is the value set by the Audio Delay Select-A control.
B
The delay time for this audio pair is the value set by the Audio Delay Select-B control.
V
Adds an audio delay equal to the unit's video Internal Delay setting when enabled.
Auto DE (MUX4649 Only)
When selected, the unit alters the audio delay by up to half a frame to automatically place the Dolby E header on the same line as specified by the Dolby E Auto Line No control on the Dolby E Auto Line page. RollTrack and GPI inputs must be static when contributing to delay controls using Auto DE.
Page 47
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
This diagram illustrates the audio delay processes.
Delay 1
Audio Delay Select A Manual RollTrack Audio Delay Select B Manual RollTrack
Delay 3 Min A B
Int Off
Eight Delay Control Channels for Embeded Signals
Delay 4 Delay 5 Delay 6
Delayed Audio Outputs
Delay 2
Delay 7 Delay 8
Audio Inputs
Video Delay Minimum Audio Frames Manual H and V, milliseconds
Synchronizing SRCs 1 and 2
Delay 10
3 and 4
Delay 11
Eight Delay Control Channels for AES Signals
Delay 12 Delay 13 Delay 14
Page 48
Delayed Audio Outputs
Delay 9
5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and10 11 and 12
Delay 15
13 and 14
Delay 16
15 and 16
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
For each audio delay control, Audio Delay Select-A and Audio Delay Select-B, a combination of the following delay drivers are used to set the value of the delay: •
Manual: Manually adjusts the delay.
•
RollTrack: A delay set by external RollTracks will be applied. Delay values can be applied via RollTracks 14 to 17 inclusive. RollTracks are signals sent between pieces of equipment so that they can work together in concert. Two modules can exchange delay values through the RollTrack system. For example, the delay used for audio passing through this remultiplexer could be set by the delay specified on a video synchronizer. For more information, see the RollTrack Audio Delay processing section.
Audio Delay Select-A/B This function allows delay times (A and B) to be applied to the delay processor block. For both Audio Delay A and Audio Delay B, you can use the following delay methods: Manual Coarse Delay To specify a manual delay, select the Manual Delay check box, and use the slider bar to specify the value of the delay. The delay range is -40.0 ms to 2000.00 ms, adjusted in 0.25 ms steps. For finer adjustments, use the Manual Fine Delay control, which is described below. The preset value is 0.00 ms.
RollTrack RollTracks are signals sent between pieces of equipment so that they can work together in concert. For example two modules can exchange delay values through the RollTrack system. The delay used for the audio passing through this remultiplexer module could be set for example, by the delay through a video synchronizer. Audio Delay values can be applied via RollTracks 14, 15, 16 and 17.
Page 49
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
For more details please see the RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking section.
Total Delay This indicator shows the total delay value that the control (A or B) is currently set. Any delay block being controlled by that control (A or B) will be set to this value plus the video Internal Delay (if selected). It is a useful check that the right combination of delays has been applied. It only indicates delays applied at this stage of the processing and not individual pair delays applied to the audio inputs. One of the useful features is being able to see whether tracking delays are changing their value. The minimum amount of total delay shown here will be 3.0 ms, which is the system minimum delay in PCM. Data mode is made consistent with PCM by adding 88 samples worth of delay.
Smooth Delay Limit Under normal circumstances, when audio tracks video, it slowly creeps up to track with video. Sometimes however, it may be preferable to have the audio immediately jump to the tracking point. The Smooth Delay Limit control adjusts the time that it takes for the audio to sync with the video. The range of this control is 0ms to 80ms. The preset value is 80ms.
AES Delay 1 to 8 and Embed Delay 1 to 8 These display the controls for each of the 8 AES and 8 Embeded delay blocks. For each delay block the delay can be derived from one of the following settings: Min
Effectively zero delay but when no Internal delay is added it is limited to the minimum audio delay of approx. 0.75 ms or 3 ms if via a SRC.
A
The delay time for this audio pair is the value set by the Audio Delay Select-A control.
B
The delay time for this audio pair is the value set by the Audio Delay Select-B control.
V
Adds an audio delay equal to the unit's video Internal Delay setting when enabled.
Fine Delay
Use the Manual Fine Delay control to specify manual delays finer than 0.25 ms (the adjustment increment of the Manual Coarse Delay control). The delay specified by this control is added to the value set with the Manual Coarse Delay control. The delay range is ±0.244 ms in 5 ms to 6 ms steps. The preset value is 0.00 ms.
Fine (+A|B +V)=Total This displays the total of the A or B delay time, plus any manual fine delay, plus the internal video delay. Limit If LO appears to the right of the check boxes, the delay set is lower than the minimum delay (0.75 ms or 3.0 ms).
Page 50
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Auto DE (IQMUX46-49 Only)
When selected, the unit alters the audio delay by up to half a frame to automatically place the Dolby E header on the same line as specified by the Dolby E Auto Line No control on the Video Delay/Dolby E Auto Line page. For more information, see page 41 When an IQMUX is used as a post-switch firewall in an agile setting. Use of Mixed mode, whilst disabling procamps, provides for clean switching between PCM and Data such as Dolby E. Provided that the decoder can change modes cleanly it is possible to have a "hot" switch between types without any mute or disturbance. Since PCM has no alignment requirement the Auto DE controller will allow the audio delay to drift to the actual requested delay when PCM is detected, and a switch back to a Dolby E source will give some misalignment error during the Auto DE recovery time - and probably a decoder mute. For this reason it is essential that a pre-switch alignment firewall is used on the Dolby E source(s), and that the PCM delay is set to the nominal delay for correct alignment - probably an integer number of frames. There are additional controls which should be selected for reliable operation in the presence of other ancillary data, in particular for standard definition video: • Embedder Priority (Embed On/Off page) should be set to Audio. This will prioritize audio packet insertion so the requested line is always available. • Use Embedded Reader (Dolby E Auto Line page) should be enabled. This allows the automatic alignment adjustment to be made using the actual embedded data to ensure the requested line is achieved.
Page 51
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embed On/Off Settings Use the Embed On/Off functions to specify how the module handles the embedding of audio into the output HD-SDI or SD-SDI video stream. The audio inputs are arranged into four groups, comprising two channel pairs each. For each group, the module can be configured to: •
Pass audio unchanged.
•
Remove audio data from the stream.
•
Embed audio data into the stream.
By default, audio data is embedded in each group. Within each group, specify whether each channel, for example, Pair 1 Left or Pair 1 Right, is active or disabled. A disabled channel is muted and flagged as absent, with the channel status indicating 48 kHz synchronous audio. This does not change the group behavior.
Embedder Priority Selecting Audio (Dolby E) causes audio to be embedded first. This ensures that audio data, such as Dolby E is on a specific line. If processing Dolby E, it is recommended that this option is selected.
Group/Channel Active For each Group (Group 1 to Group 4): •
To allow audio data to pass through the unit unchanged, select Pass.
Page 52
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
•
To remove audio data from the incoming stream, select Blank.
•
To embed audio data into the stream, select Embed.
For each channel within each group: •
To activate the channel, select the corresponding check box.
•
To disable the channel, clear the corresponding check box.
For more information about Audio Embedding, see Ancillary Passing and Audio Embedding on page 147.
Page 53
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedded I/P Setup Use the Embedded I/P Setup screen to specify whether an input audio pair should be treated as: •
PCM audio
•
Data
•
Mixed mode
This screen also allows the names of the disembedded audio inputs to be changed from the default names (Disembed 1 etc.). The input embedded audio must be sampled at 48 kHz Up to 20 bit resolution is supported in SD video standards, and up to 24 bit resolution is supported in all HD video standards. The mixer, routing, and ProcAmp functions are channel-based and can pass or process on either channel. However, audio delays are pair-based and it is not possible to apply a different delay to the two channels of an input audio pair. Embedded audio is a pair based system. This means that they carry the sound as two channels and it is not possible to carry just one channel. Of course, the unit can pass and process either channel as well as both. This is because the module is channel-based internally. When an embedded feed is used to carry non-PCM data then the whole data space is allocated to that function. In this mode the feed has to be treated together, it has to be treated as the equivalent of a pair. For example a non PCM feed at the input will occupy the same space as two audio channels and must be passed to the output as two channels of data.
PCM If PCM mode is selected, the pair will be treated as PCM audio by the module. PCM processing can be either channel-based or stereo based. By default, channels are configured as stereo pairs. To switch to channel-based
Page 54
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
processing, clear the Stereo check box. PCM mode allows audio-specific operations, such as gain and tracking delay, to be adjusted by means of the Mixers and Proc Amps. In PCM mode, channel status is overwritten with filtered channel status from the input, and is assumed to be steady state 48 kHz synchronous professional, with audio or data type as indicated on the source. If Data is flagged by channel status the unit will still respond by disabling processing operations including forcing pair-based routing, thus giving a data-compatible audio path.
Data If Data mode is selected, the pair will be treated as a non-PCM data feed through the circuitry within the module. This mode also protects the feed from PCM audio-specific operations such as gain and tracking delay. It also ensures that the audio is routed as a pair. In Data mode, channel status is overwritten with filtered channel status from the input, and is assumed to be steady state 48 kHz synchronous professional, with audio or data type as indicated on the source. One stream is equivalent to two PCM audio channels so in this mode there are no operations that can split the data. PCM audio will still be passed, and the channel status will follow the input type.
Mixed If Mixed mode is selected, processing occurs as with Data mode; however, the channel status overwrite mechanism is bypassed and set to ‘pass through’ on a channel by channel basis. One stream is equivalent to two PCM audio channels so in this mode there are no operations that can split the data. This mode is suitable for processing Dolby E and Dolby AC3 (Dolby Digital) data, when transitions between data and PCM audio will be passed cleanly with the source channel status, allowing decoders the best chance of handling the transition.
Embedded Audio Input Names By default, channels are designated as stereo pairs. To name each channel individually, clear the Stereo check box. •
To change a disembedded audio input name, type the new name in the field, and click S.
•
To return to the default name, click P. Note:
When a channel is designated as a stereo signal, the corresponding left/right channel does not appear.
Names are stored in the Memory function so that a new set of names can be recalled by memory. These names are used in the lists for the following functions: •
Audio Mixer Inputs
•
AES Routing
•
Monitoring Routing
•
Embedded Routing
•
Embedded Input Setup
Page 55
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedded O/P Setup Use the Embedded O/P Setup settings to change the names of the embedded audio outputs and designate stereo pairs. The output embedded audio is always sampled at 48 kHz and synchronized to the output video. Up to 20 bit resolution is supported in SD video standards, and up to 24 bit resolution is supported in all HD video standards. To access these settings, select Embedded O/P Setup from the function list.
Setting up Embedded Output By default, channels are designated as stereo pairs. To name each channel individually, clear the Stereo check box. •
To change an embedded audio output name, type the new name in the field, and click S.
•
To return to the default name, click P. Note:
When a channel is designated as a stereo signal, the corresponding left/right channel does not appear.
Names are stored in the Memory function so that a new set of names can be recalled by memory. These names are used in the lists for the following functions: •
Embedded Routing
•
Embedded ProcAmps
Page 56
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
HANC and VBI Blanking Settings The settings on the HANC & VBI blank screen: •
Specify whether vertical interval data (VBI), is blanked or passed through the module. Note that the Input Ancillary Blank All, Blank HANC, and Pass settings allow ancillary blanking to be globally defined and do not change with output standard.
•
Blanking can be applied to all lines or to specific lines, depending on the selected standard. Each standard can have different blanking applied.
•
Specify whether, and under what circumstances, horizontal ancillary data is blanked or passed through the module.
To access these settings, select HANC & VBI blank from the function list.
Specifying Vertical Interval Data (VBI) Blanking Settings Vertical Interval Data contained in the input stream can be blanked or passed through the module. To do this, specify the input standard and then select the lines to blank. Alternatively, you can choose to pass all lines, or blank all lines. The input standards, for the purpose of VBI blanking, are: 1125(1080)/30i
1125(1080)/29sf
1125(1080)/24sf
750(720)/60p
1125(1080)/30p
1125(1080)/25i
1125(1080)/23p
750(720)/59p
1125(1080)/30sf
1125(1080)/25p
1125(1080)/23sf
750(720)/50p
1125(1080)/29i
1125(1080)/25sf
1125(1035)/30i
525(480)/29i
1125(1080)/29p
1125(1080)/24p
1125(1035)/29i
625(576)/25i
To configure VBI blanking settings: 1. In the VBI for Standard list, select the standard for which to configure VBI blanking. 2. Do one of the following: • In the Blank Lines section, select the lines to blank. The selected lines will not be passed to the output signal. • Click Blank All Lines. This selects all the check boxes in the Blank Lines section. All displayed vertical interval lines will be blanked.
Page 57
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
•
Click Pass All Lines. This clears all the check boxes in the Blank Lines section. All displayed vertical interval lines will be passed.
Specifying Horizontal Ancillary Data (HANC) Blanking Settings The Input Ancillary Controls specify whether to: •
Remove all ancillary data.
•
Remove only horizontal ancillary data.
•
Allow ancillary data to pass unaltered.
•
Remove all ancillary data, if the input signal fails to match the output standard. Note:
Embedded audio (as enabled for embedding) and EDH controls are not affected by these controls.
To remove all ancillary data: •
In the Input Ancillary section, select Blank All. This setting overrides the VBI Blank Lines control.
To remove only horizontal ancillary data (HANC); •
In the Input Ancillary section, select Blank HANC.
To allow ancillary data to pass unaltered: •
In the Input Ancillary section, select Pass. When Pass is selected, pass-through operations will not alter audio packets for groups that are not selected for embedding.
To remove all ancillary data if the input signal fails to match the output standard: •
In the Input Ancillary section, select Blank All on STD mismatch.
Page 58
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES I/O Setup Use these settings to: •
Configure AES ports.
•
Configure AES sources.
The module’s AES inputs can accept a wide range of signal types. Sampling rates from 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz can be accommodated because each input pair has a built in sample rate converter. PCM signals do not need to be synchronous to the output video because the input circuitry performs synchronization. Signals of 16-bit, 20-bit, or 24-bit resolution can be processed and embedded. Both standard professional AES signals and the consumer protocol IEC-958 type II (sometimes referred to as SPDIF) signals are accepted. Regardless of the signal, the AES outputs always operate at the standard 48 kHz sampling rate and are synchronized to the output video. In addition to accepting a wide range of PCM signals, the AES ports accept non-PCM data, such as Dolby E and Dolby AC3 (Dolby Digital) feeds. Note that non-PCM data feeds must be synchronous to the video. In the case of Dolby E, this not only means that the data clock must be synchronized, but also that the Dolby E blocks must align to the video boundaries, otherwise, the signal becomes liable to corruption on video switching and recording. Note:
The IQMUX42-1A, IQMUX44-1A, IQMUX46-1A, and IQMUX48-1A only have five ports. Although ports 6 – 8 appear on the setup screens, they cannot be configured.
To access these settings, select AES I/O Setup 1-4 or AES I/O Setup 5-8 from the function list.
Page 59
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Each AES port can be configured as either an input or an output. As well, each port can be renamed, for example, to reflect the signal that it is carrying. By default The AES ports are designated as stereo sources. However, each channel can be named individually. These names are used for the following functions: •
AES ProcAmp
•
AES Routing
To specify whether the port is an input or an output: •
To designate the port as an output, select the Output check box.
•
To designate the port as an input, clear the Output check box.
When a port is configured as an input, the AES port appears in the router listings at the bottom of the screen. This can be used to specify a different port routing if necessary. •
To rename a port, type the name of the port in the text field and click S. To name each channel individually, clear the Stereo check box.
•
To return the port to its default name, click P.
Configure each AES port to handle PCM audio, non-PCM data, or both. This selection is essential if Dolby E or Dolby AC3 (Dolby Digital) is being passed through an AES port.
Page 60
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Note:
In data and mixed modes, the Sample Rate Converter (SRC) is bypassed. AES channel status (audio/non-audio) is used to detect non-PCM.
PCM If PCM mode is selected, the pair will be treated as PCM audio by the module. PCM processing can be either channel-based or stereo based. By default, channels are configured as stereo pairs. To switch to channel-based processing, clear the Stereo check box. PCM mode allows audio-specific operations, such as gain and tracking delay, to be adjusted by means of the Mixers and Proc Amps. In PCM mode, channel status is overwritten with filtered channel status from the input, and is assumed to be steady state 48 kHz synchronous professional, with audio or data type as indicated on the source. If Data is flagged by channel status the unit will still respond by disabling processing operations including sample rate conversion, and forcing pair-based routing, thus giving a data-compatible audio path.
Data If Data mode is selected, the pair will be treated as a non-PCM data feed through the circuitry within the module. This mode also protects the feed from PCM audio-specific operations such as gain and tracking delay. It also ensures that the audio is routed as a pair. In Data mode, channel status is overwritten with filtered channel status from the input, and is assumed to be steady state 48 kHz synchronous professional, with audio or data type as indicated on the source. One stream is equivalent to two PCM audio channels so in this mode there are no operations that can split the data. PCM audio will still be passed, and the channel status will follow the input type.
Mixed If Mixed mode is selected, processing occurs as with Data mode; however, the channel status overwrite mechanism is bypassed and set to ‘pass through’ on a channel by channel basis. One stream is equivalent to two PCM audio channels so in this mode there are no operations that can split the data. This mode is suitable for processing Dolby E and Dolby AC3 (Dolby Digital) data, when transitions between data and PCM audio will be passed cleanly with the source channel status, allowing decoders the best chance of handling the transition. As well, each source can be renamed. By default, the AES sources are designated as stereo sources. However, each channel can be named individually. These names are used for the following functions: •
Audio Mixer inputs
•
AES Routing
•
Monitor Routing
•
Embedded Routing.
To rename a source: Type the name of the source in the text field and click S. To name each channel individually, clear the Stereo check box. To return the source to its default name, click the preset button (P).
Page 61
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
RollTrack Settings The RollTrack settings allow information to be sent, by means of the RollCall network, to other compatible units on the same network. Use the settings on the RollTrack screen to: •
Enable or disable the RollTrack functions.
•
Configure up to 16 RollTrack outputs.
•
Specify the conditions that trigger RollTrack data transmission.
•
Set RollTrack destinations.
•
Specify the RollTrack commands to be sent.
RollTrack Sources The RollTrack Source specifies the source of the information that triggers the transmission of data. The options are: Unused
Video Delay
Input Present
Input Loss
O/p Freeze
O/p UnFreeze
De-embed 1-8 Data
De-embed 1-8 PCM
De-embed 1-8 Lost
AES 1-8 Data
AES 1-8 PCM
AES 1-8 Lost
Output: 1080
Output: 720
Output: 576(625)
Output: 480(525)
RollTrack Addresses The full RollTrack Address comprises four sets of numbers. For example, 0000:10:01*99. The first set, 0000 in the example, is the network segment code number. The second set, 10 in the example, identifies the enclosure/mainframe unit.
Page 62
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
The third set, 01 in the example, identifies the slot number in the unit. The fourth set, 99 in the example, is a user-configured number that uniquely identifies the destination unit in a multi-unit system. This ensures that only the correct unit responds to commands. If left at 00, an incorrectly fitted unit may respond inappropriately.
RollTrack Commands Each RollTrack command comprises two sets of numbers, for example, 33039:3. The first set, 33039 in the example, is the RollTrack command number, which identifies the command. The second set, 3 in the example, is the value that is sent with the command.
Using RollTracks To enable or disable RollTrack functions: •
To enable the RollTrack functions, clear the Disable All check box.
•
To disable RollTrack functions, select the Disable All check box.
To configure a RollTrack action: 1. Select the Index number. This identifies the RollTrack action being configured. Up to 16 RollTrack actions can be created. 2. From the Source list, select the source of the information that will trigger RollTrack transmission. 3. Enter the RollTrack Address and click S. To return the address to its default value, click P. 4. Enter the RollTrack Command and click S. To return the value to its default, click P.
Viewing RollTrack Information RollTrack Sending and RollTrack Status display information about the status of RollTracks. RollTrack Sending displays the information when the unit is actively sending a RollTrack command: •
String: A string value is being sent.
•
Number: A number value is being sent.
•
No: The command is not being sent.
•
Yes: The command is being sent.
•
Internal Type Error: Inconsistent behavior. Contact your local Snell & Wilcox agent.
RollTrack Status displays the status of the currently selected RollTrack Index: •
OK: RollTrack message sent and received OK.
•
Unknown: RollTrack message has been sent but has not yet completed.
•
Timeout: RollTrack message sent, but acknowledgement not received. This could be because the destination unit is not at the specified location.
•
Bad: RollTrack message has not been sent correctly, acknowledged at the destination unit. This could be because the destination unit is not of the type specified.
•
Disabled: RollTrack sending is disabled.
Page 63
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Memory Settings Use the Memory function to save up to 16 setups to be recalled later. All of the module’s controls are classed as either system or user. In general, system controls are the controls that are seldom changed once set up, and user controls are those controls that are likely to be changed frequently. The Memory page is intended to store only user memories. On the other hand, a RollCall Saveset stores both the user memories and system memories. For more information about Savesets, refer to the RollCall Control Panel manual.
Saving to Memory The Memory Function can save the settings of all items to memory. Default memory names can be changed to provide more meaningful descriptions. To save settings: •
In the Save Memory column, select a memory location, and then click Save. The settings are saved and the memory appears the Recall Memory column.
To change a memory name: •
In the Save Memory Name field, type the new memory name, and then click S. To return the memory to its default value, click P.
Page 64
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Recalling Memory Use the Recall Memory function to recall the settings saved in a memory location. Last Recalled Memory displays the most recently recalled memory. An asterisk (*) appears after the last recalled memory name if adjustments have been made to any of the settings after it has been recalled. If no memory choice has been made, or if the previous choice has been invalidated (because of a control change), None Selected is displayed. To recall a memory: •
In the Recall Memory column, select the memory to recall. The recalled settings will be applied and the memory name will appear in the Last Recalled Memory section.
Page 65
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Logging Information about several parameters can be made available to a logging device that is connected to the RollCall network. Each logging screen comprises three columns: •
Log Enable: Select the check boxes that correspond to the parameters for which log information should be collected.
•
Log Field: Displays the name of the logging field.
•
Log Value: Displays the current log value.
Video Logging records the status of video inputs and outputs.
Page 66
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Embedded Aud Logging records the status of the Embedded Audio inputs.
Page 67
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
O/P Aud Logging records the status of the embedded audio outputs.
Page 68
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
O/P Aud Level Logging records the level of the embedded audio outputs.
O/P Dolby E Logging records the presence of Dolby E signals, and their timing, with respect to the video.
Page 69
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES Input Logging records the status of the AES audio inputs.
Page 70
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
AES Output Logging records the status of the AES audio outputs.
Misc. Logging record miscellaneous information about the unit.
Page 71
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
The Setup Screen The Setup screen displays basic information about the unit. Use the Setup screen to reset the unit to factory defaults, and to reboot the unit.
The following information is displayed: •
Product: Displays the name of the module.
•
Software Version: Displays the current software version.
•
Serial No.: Displays the module’s serial number.
•
Build: Displays the factory build number. This number identifies all parameters of the unit (software version, build level, etc…).
•
Firmware: Displays the version of the firmware system.
•
KOS: Displays the version of the operating system.
•
PCB: displays the PCB revision number.
To reset the all of the unit’s adjustments to their factory defaults, leaving all User Memories intact, click Default Settings. Click Factory Defaults to reset the all of the unit’s adjustments to their factory default setting. Note: this selection will delete all User Memories. To reboot the unit, simulating a power-up/power-down cycle, click Restart. Note:
The Engineer Page Password provides access to the Engineer page. Access to this page is reserved for the use of Snell & Wilcox staff.
Page 74
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Diagnostics Warning:
Running these tests affects the video output signal.
Use the diagnostic functions to run a number of tests to determine how the unit is functioning. Tests can be performed as either a single test, or continuously in a loop. Note:
Only one test can be run at a time. When a test is running, all other options become unavailable. The All tests display, has no function at the operating level and is reserved for factory use only.
Diagnostic Test Descriptions Video Memory Test The Video Memory Test is a detailed test of the SDRAM video store. Note:
This test might take in excess of 30 minutes to complete.
SDI Loopback Test The SDI Loopback Test tests the input/output path between input 1 and output 1 when connected together. AES Loopback Test The AES Loopback Test tests the input/output path between AES 1 and AES 2, AES 3 and AES 4, AES 5 and AES 6, AES 7 and AES 8 when connected together. An AES port is set up to transmit a tone signal and the connected input is checked for the presence of an error-free signal. The test is then performed both with and without the sample rate converter in circuit. Each test is performed twice – once in each direction. SRC Test The SRC Test verifies that the Sample Rate Converter is connected and working.
Running Diagnostic Tests To run any of the diagnostic tests once, click Run Test. To run any of the diagnostic tests in a continuous loop, click Loop Test. To stop tests, click STOP TESTS.
Page 75
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Operation from an Active Control Panel The card can be operated from an active control panel via the RollCall network.
All operational parameters and selections are made using a system of menus displayed in two LCD windows. These menus duplicate the functions that are available via the RollCall control panel screens. Operational details for the remote control panel can be found in the Modular System Operator's Manual. The Information window has four lines of text indicating the current state of the unit.
03:IQMUX46 INP: LOST Out:Unknown PPPP PPPP ---- ----P------
The Control window displays all Selection Menus and sub-menus. Selections are made by pressing the button adjacent to the required item.
◀ Input
Output ▶
◀ Audio
Video Delay ▶
◀ Utils
Memories ▶
The main or top level menu allows various sub-menus to be selected by pressing the button adjacent to the required text line. Note that where a menu item is followed by three dots (...) this indicates that a further sub-menu may be selected. Whenever a menu item is selected the parameters of that selection will be displayed in the Information window of the front panel. Where the selection is purely a mode selection and does not enable a sub-menu, the text will become reversed (white-on-black) indicating that the mode is active. If the mode is not available for selection the text will remain normal.
Page 76
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking RollTrack is a feature of RollCall™ (Snell & Wilcox’s proprietary remote control system), that allows devices to communicate across the RollCall network with no direct user intervention. RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking enables Snell & Wilcox RollCall™ compatible audio delay products to track delay introduced by RollCall™ compatible video processing products. The simplest configuration is a single video unit and a single audio delay in a RollCall™ system. The audio delay will have the same delay as through the video path. If the delay changes the audio delay will track.
delayed video by 10 ms
IQD1FSY
4:2:2
RollCall connection
Analogue Audio
delayed audio by 10 ms
IQBADC
The next level of configuration is where there are multiple Frame Synchronizers (for example) each connected through RollCall™ to their own tracking Audio Delay. (It is worth stating that the synchronizers and audio delays do not have to be in the same enclosure; the addressing scheme, discussed later, allows for the units to be positioned anywhere in the RollCall™ domain.) The maximum number of video units and audio delays in a RollCall™ system is set by the maximum limit of the number of modules in a RollCall™ network and is currently 3840 on a single network without bridges. The unique identification of the destination unit (a decimal number) for various modules is as follows: Module IQBADC IQBDAC IQBAAD IQBDAD IQBSYN IQBADCD
ID 51 52 53 54 89 107
Page 139
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
The next level of complexity is a vertical delay cluster where a video unit can have up to eight audio delays tracking - of the same or different types.
delayed video by 10 ms changes to 20 ms
IQD1FSY
4:2:2
RollCall network connection
Analogue Audio
Analogue Audio
delayed audio by 10 ms tracks to 20 ms
IQBADC
delayed audio by 10 ms tracks to 20 ms
IQBAAD
From one to eight audio delay products can be connected via RollCall™ to a single frame synchronizer, for example. If the synchronizer delay changes, then however many audio delays are connected will track the delay. The audio delays can also have a manual delay which will be added to the RollTrack delay. The next level of complexity is a horizontal delay cluster where an audio delay can track up to four video units.
IQDMSDA Δ1
IQD1FSY Δ2
IQD1FSY Δ3
IQD1FSY Δ4
RollCall network connection
IQBADC
Δm (= manual delay set in the BADC) Total delay:
ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
Page 140
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
The total delay time through the audio delay is then the sum of the individual delays introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit. The manual delay can be set to compensate for any fixed propagation delay in the video path or may be set to zero. The next level of complexity is a matrix delay cluster where each audio delay (up to eight) can track up to four video units. This configuration is in effect a four by eight matrix of video units and audio delay units. The total delay time through the audio delay units is then the sum of the individual delays introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit.
IQDMSDA Δ1
IQD1FSY Δ2
IQD1FSY Δ3
IQD1FSY Δ4
RollCall network i
IQBDAD 1 ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
IQBDAD 8 ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm As any of the delay times change in the video path so will the audio delay time track this delay. A virtual connection is made between from, say, an IQD1FSY to an IQBDAD by: selecting the Setup... Menu of the IQD1FSY then selecting the Audio_Delay... Menu then choosing from Unit_1 to Unit_8 then entering the unique network address of the IQBDAD in the form nnnn:xx:yy*z*d where nnnn = network address and in most cases will be 0000(hex); xx = IQ enclosure address (hex); yy = slot address of the IQBDAD (hex) z = the connection (or channel) number (decimal) - see table below. d = the unique identification of the destination unit (decimal) The ID entered must match the receiving units own ID or else the command will be ignored. If the ID value is set to 00, the receiving unit does not perform an ID match and will always accept the incoming command then selecting the Delay... Menu of the IQBDAD then selecting RollTrack
Audio delay 1 Audio delay 2 Audio delay 3 Audio delay 4
Example of Network Addresses with Channel Numbers and ID Numbers D1FSY 1 D1FSY 2 D1FSY 3 D1FSY 4 0000:10:01*14*54 0000:10:01*16*54 0000:10:01*17*54 0000:10:01*15*54 0000:10:03*14*54 0000:10:05*14*54 0000:10:07*14*54
0000:10:03*15*54 0000:10:05*15*54 0000:10:07*15*54
Page 141
0000:10:03*16*54 0000:10:05*16*54 0000:10:07*16*54
0000:10:03*17*54 0000:10:05*17*54 0000:10:07*17*54
IQMUX42 – 49
Audio delay 5 Audio delay 6 Audio delay 7 Audio delay 8
Version 2 Issue 2
0000:10:09*14*54 0000:10:0B*14*54 0000:10:0D*14*54 0000:10:0F*14*54
0000:10:09*15*54 0000:10:0B*15*54 0000:10:0D*15*54 0000:10:0F*15*54
Page 142
0000:10:09*16*54 0000:10:0B*16*54 0000:10:0D*16*54 0000:10:0F*16*54
0000:10:09*17*54 0000:10:0B*17*54 0000:10:0D*17*54 0000:10:0F*17*54
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
The most complex system would be an array of matrix delay clusters
Page 143
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Page 144
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Dolby-E What is Dolby E?
Dolby E is a digital audio technology optimized for the distribution of surround and multichannel audio through digital two-channel postproduction and broadcasting infrastructures. The Dolby E signal does not reach viewers at home. It is decoded back to baseband audio just prior to the final DTV transmission and then re-encoded into the final audio format specified by the various DTV emission systems (for example, Dolby Digital in ATSC, DVB, satellite, and cable systems; and AAC for ISDB in Japan). With Dolby E, up to eight channels of audio, plus consumer and professional metadata, can be distributed via any stereo (AES/EBU) channel or recorded onto two audio tracks of conventional digital video tapes, video servers, communication links, switchers, and routers. Because the frame rate of Dolby E matches that of the video it accompanies, programs can be effortlessly switched, edited, and successfully encoded and decoded many times throughout the various stages of the broadcast chain. Audio/video synchronization is also simplified, with exactly one frame of delay added per Dolby E encode or decode stage.
Dolby E and Metadata Metadata allows content providers unprecedented control over how a program will be reproduced in the home. Dolby E conveniently transports both consumer and professional metadata created during program production. Consumer parameters (transferred as a serial data stream from Dolby E to Dolby Digital codecs during the final audio encode, just prior to multiplexing with the digital video for final DTV transmission) are carried in both the Dolby E and the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while professional parameters are carried only in Dolby E and never reach viewers. All metadata parameters can pass unchanged through the various broadcast distribution stages.
Dolby E Partner Program The Dolby E Partner Program provides broadcasters and systems designers with information about Dolby E compatibility of professional broadcast products. This information will help you plan your product purchase and system design decisions to create a clear path in your facility for the benefits and advantages of Dolby E technology.
16 and 20-bit Dolby E And any signal path that can carry a 16- or 20-bit audio signal, SMPTE 302M compatible, can carry Dolby E.
Page 145
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
If the supported word length is 16 bits, the two channels together will offer a bandwidth of 1.536 Mbps, which Dolby E can use to carry six discrete audio channels plus metadata (descriptive and playback-control data related to the audio). If 20-bit word length is available, the two channels will yield a combined bit rate of 1.92 kbps, which Dolby E uses to carry up to eight channels (perhaps a 6-channel surround mix plus a separate stereo mix), as well as metadata. A 24-bit mode is also specified for the Dolby E format but not yet implemented in encoders and decoders.
Dolby Digital and AC3
Also known as AC-3, Dolby Digital delivers up to 5.1 discrete channels of surround sound and is applied to the final broadcast transmission signal, just prior to multiplexing with the digital video. It is used extensively today on digital satellite (DBS), cable, and DTV and HDTV terrestrial services (including ATSC and DVB). The flexibility of Dolby Digital enables broadcasters to deliver any number of audio channels, from all encompassing 5.1 surround sound down to mono audio, plus multiple-language programs and other specialized services. In the home, the Dolby Digital signal adapts to the viewer's playback system, delivering the best possible sound to all viewers, regardless of their equipment. To enjoy the full 5.1 surround experience, viewers simply connect any DTV set-top box with a Dolby Digital output to a Dolby Digital home theater receiver.
Metadata The key to the adaptability of Dolby Digital is metadata, "data about the audio data." Metadata is created during the production of DTV programming and is carried in the Dolby Digital bitstream. Metadata parameters maintain the "vision" of the audio created by a program's producer, make life easier for broadcasters, and give viewers the best audio DTV has to offer, whether viewers own mono, stereo, or 5.1-channel audio system © 2005 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved
Page 146
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Ancillary Passing and Audio Embedding The SMPTE 272M and 299M standard specifications allow for up to four groups of AES/EBU digital audio to be embedded in a component digital video SD or HD stream respectively. Each group consists of two stereo pairs, comprising four channels, resulting in a total of sixteen audio channels for all four groups. This horizontal ancillary (HANC) data increasingly shares space with other types of ancillary data such as EDH, timecode and UMID labels making the insertion and passing a complex process. Processing of audio by the module requires the reinsertion of the audio into the passed ancillary data. This is essentially separate from the extraction of audio from the input video, and allows the embedded audio to be firewalled when input disturbances force blanking of ancillary space. For 625-line (or other 25Hz) video, 1920 audio samples occur in each frame. Whereas for 525-line (or other 29.97 Hz) video, 8008 audio samples occur over five video frames. Audio data is distributed evenly throughout each video frame, situated in the non-active picture regions between the end of one line and the start of the next. In SD, most lines contain three or four audio samples per active group. In HD, most lines contain one or two samples per active group. Additional lines are reserved after the SMPTE RP168 switch points, which contain no samples. This is in contrast to most ancillary data, which resides in a fairly fixed HANC or VANC (vertical ancillary) space. Audio Control and Extended Data packets, as defined in SMPTE 272M (SD), are not inserted by the module. Instead, they are handled by the ‘passing’ and ‘blanking’ functions. Audio Control packets, as defined in SMPTE 299M (HD), are always inserted. Block numbering as defined in SMPTE 291M is supported. The SMPTE 291M standard defines the structure and space formatting for ancillary data within digital video streams. Within HANC data space, ancillary packets follow immediately after the end of active video (EAV) marker, including line numbers in HD. They are contiguous with each other until either the end of the last packet or the start of active video (SAV) marker. Unused space is filled with black level blanking. Likewise, VANC data space follows from the SAV to the EAV markers throughout vertical blanking, which is in principal similar to vertical blanking interval (VBI) use in legacy SD environments for typically analogue data waveforms. The module allows separate blanking of HANC and VBI line spaces to completely remove data stored within those spaces for when specific applications demand it. Complying with SMPTE 291M, the embedder uses a two-stage process, as follows: •
The embedder reformats the incoming ancillary to remove unwanted data which is already marked as deleted or audio packets that are marked for removal here, for example, when blanking or reinserting. Additional packets that are always removed are EDH packets (which are always reinserted) and Start and End Marker packets (which are never reinserted). This makes for the most efficient use of the data space and gives priority to passed data.
•
The new audio data and control packets are appended in the remaining space.
The ancillary formatter passes any data space with no recognizable ancillary packets unchanged, but will operate when it finds a packet after EAV or SAV.
Page 147
IQMUX42 – 49
Version 2 Issue 2
Data packets for passing are buffered while deleted packets are dropped. This requires a holding buffer and a delay so that all passed packets can be shuffled up earlier in the data space without gaps. The following embed control section looks for the first free space after EAV. Once found, the embedding process is initiated with the first enabled group inserter. However, before starting the embedding for any of the inserter streams the remaining data space is checked to ensure that there is enough room for the ancillary packet. If not, the inserter is disabled to prevent corruption of the video format or generation of invalid ancillary data packets. This situation is a sample overflow which simply causes the data to be delayed until the following line. If this is repeated over many lines, there will be a full embed overflow, which is reported in the Audio Status window, on the card edge yellow Warning LED, and is logged. Embedded ancillary data that does not conform to the space formatting requirements of SMPTE 291M may not be recognized, and so could be destroyed by the module. For example, if the data packets do not start immediately following the EAV marker the inserter will overwrite the packets. Similarly, if a data packet does start in the correct place but a second packet does not immediately follow the first one the second packet will be overwritten. To summarize: •
Marked for Deletion and audio packets to be replaced, are removed from the ancillary data space for most efficient and clean use of data space.
•
Ancillary packets are shuffled up within the data space during reformatting.
•
Incoming ancillary data must be SMPTE 291M compliant.
Page 148
RPAN Router Control Panel
Operator’s Manual © June 2006 www.snellwilcox.com Snell & Wilcox Ltd., Southleigh Park House, Eastleigh Road, Havant, Hants, PO9 2PE, United Kingdom. For technical assistance contact:
Tel: +44 (0)23 9248 9000
Fax: +44 (0)23 9245 1411
For general and sales assistance contact:
Tel: +44 (0)20 8917 4300
Fax: +44 (0)20 8607 9466
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
0.1
RPAN
SECTION 00
Table of Contents SECTION 1
Introduction Description and Features ................................................................................................... 1.1
2
Specifications ................................................................................................................... 2.1
3
Installation Unpacking .......................................................................................................................... 3.1 Power Connections ............................................................................................................ 3.1 Communication Connections ............................................................................................. 3.2
4
Operation General Description............................................................................................................ 4.1 Software Description ......................................................................................................... 4.3 General Principles of Operation ......................................................................................... 4.3 Front Panel Operation ........................................................................................................ 4.4 Button States ...................................................................................................................... 4.8 Panel Configuration ............................................................................................................ 4.9 Setup Page/Menus ............................................................................................................. 4.11
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
0.4
RPAN
SECTION 1
Description The RPAN provides button per source or global x-y control of routers over the RollCall network. RPAN Router Control Panels are for use with any RollCall-compatible routers, such as the IQDRT8, (8 by 8 SDI video router), IQDRT6, (6 by 4 SDI video router), the IQBRT8, (8 by 8 AES audio router), the IQDMX8, (8 by 1 SDI multiplexor), the IQDMX4, (4 by 1 SDI multiplexor), and the HD1132 HD SDI router family.
Various button layouts, to control between 1 and 8 destinations, between 1 and 8 sources, and between 1 and 2 levels. All buttons can carry userinserted legends to identify the source, destination, or level for that button. Illuminated buttons provide tally information to confirm selection or indicate problems. Connection to router is via RollNet coax or RS485 network. Connection to configuration client is is via RollNet coax or RS485 network, or RollCall RS422.
Features • • • • • •
Single button per Source
•
Ideal for Control of any RollCall compatible router products such as the S&W IQDRT, IQBRT, or IQDMX series
•
Can control any serially interfaced router via an IQCSPI serial interface module (available separately)
Single button per Destination (optional) Single button per Level (optional) In button LED tally including input signal status RollNet high speed connection Dual redundant power supply option
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
1.1
RPAN
SECTION 1
MODELS AVAILABLE
RPAN-8-1-1 Button per source. 8 x 1 x 1 Source
RPAN-8-8-1Global x-y. 8 x 8 x 1 Source
Destination
RPAN-8-1-2 Button per source for Video and Audio. 8 x 1 x 2 Source
V
A
V
A
RPAN-8-8-2 Global x-y for Video and Audio. 8 x 8 x 2 Source
Destination
Rear Panel View ROLLCALL ADDRESS
ROLLCALL NETWORK
RS 422 SERIAL PORT
9V DC 1.67A MADE IN UK
RS 485
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
1.2
RPAN
SECTION 2
Specifications Features Hard Keys.......................... Multi colored
Control Interface
Additional Controls via RollCall™ Remote Control System RollNet Coax ......................via BNC connector RollNet RS485....................via 9 way D type connector
Target router(s) configuration
RollCall RS422 ...................via 9 way D type connector
Hard button LED brightnessAdjustable
Controls
Power and temperature monitoring
Hard Keys...........................Up to 18 Indicators
Specifications Power .................................Via dual redundant mains operated external adapters Input 100-240V AC @ 47 to 63 Hz 1A max Output + 9V DC at 1.67 A Power Consumption ...........5.4VA max
RPANOP
280606
Temperature Range........... 0° to 40° C operating Case Type ......................... 1U rack mounting steel case Dimensions........................ 483 mm x 198 mm x 44.4 mm (w, d, h) Weight ............................... Approximately 1kg.
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
2.1
RPAN
SECTION 3
Installation Unpacking the RPAN
Supply Voltage
The unit is packed in a single carton. The contents are as follows:
The power supplies are auto switching for input voltages in the range of 100 V to 250 V nominal.
RPAN unit 1 Switch cap removal tool (part number H9 S6697) 2 Power cables 1 Mains adapter 1 Operating Manual
No voltage adjustment procedure is required.
Unpack the carton carefully and check for any shortages or shipping damage. Immediately report any shortages or damage to Snell and Wilcox Limited. POWER CONNECTIONS Mains power is supplied to the mains adapter via an IEC connector.
Mains Adapter (Supplied)
Power Supply Power is provided for the unit via the supplied mains adapters. Two mains adapters are provided and both may be connected to the unit using the 3-pin connectors. This provides power supply redundancy so that if one supply fails the unit will continue to operate normally.
RS 422 SERIAL PORT
DC power input socket
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
9V DC 1.67A
DC power input socket
Version 1 Issue 3
3.1
RPAN
SECTION 3
COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS RollCall Network
ROLLCALL NETWORK
The single BNC connector allows the unit to be connected to the RollCall™ network communications system.
RS 485
The 9 pin `D' connector on the rear panel allows the unit to be connected to the RollCall™ 485 network communications system. The RS485 communications runs at 2.5 Mbit/s (high speed). RollCall Address Both of these switches are used to define the Unit Address code for the equipment. The settings of these switches are read continuously and a new address will be registered within a few seconds.
ROLLCALL ADDRESS
Position `0' on the left-hand switch will disable the RollCall function on the unit; all other positions on these switches may be used to set the Unit Address code in Hex. Note that in a RollCall local network, all units must have different unit address codes.
RS 422 Serial Port (RollCall Control Only)
RS 422 SERIAL PORT
This 9 pin `D' connector on the rear panel allows the unit to be connected to an RS422 RollCall controller such as a personal computer.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
3.2
RPAN
SECTION 4
Operation GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The RPAN provides button per source or global x-y control of routers over the RollCall network.
Various button layouts are available to control between 1 and 8 destinations, between 1 and 8 sources, and between 1 and 2 levels. All buttons can carry user-inserted legends to identify the source, destination, or level for that button. Illuminated buttons provide tally information to confirm selection or indicate problems.
RPAN Router Control Panels are for use with any RollCall-compatible routers, such as the IQDRT8, (8 by 8 SDI video router), IQDRT6, (6 by 4 SDI video router), the IQBRT8, (8 by 8 AES audio router), the IQDMX8, (8 by 1 SDI multiplexer), the IQDMX4, (4 by 1 SDI multiplexer), and the HD1132 HD SDI router family.
Connection to router is via RollNet coax or RS485 network. Connection to configuration client is via RollNet coax or RS485 network, or RollCall RS422.
REAR PANEL VIEW ROLLCALL ADDRESS
ROLLCALL NETWORK
RS 422 SERIAL PORT
9V DC 1.67A MADE IN UK
RS 485
MODELS AVAILABLE RPAN-8-1-1 RPAN-8-8-1 RPAN-8-1-2 RPAN-8-8-2
Button per source control panel, single destination, and single level. XY control panel, single level. Button per source control panel with Audio and Video selection. XY control panel with Audio and Video selection.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.1
RPAN
SECTION 4
DESCRIPTION FOR SPECIFIC MODELS RPAN-8-1-1 Source
For use as a button per source control panel with a single router level. 8 buttons are provided to select sources to the assigned destination and level. RPAN-8-8-1 Source
Destination
For use as a XY control panel with a single router level. 8 buttons are provided to select sources to the assigned destination. Another 8 buttons are provided to select the destination of interest.
RPAN-8-1-2 Source
V
A
For use as a button per source control panel with 2 router levels. 8 buttons are provided to select sources to the assigned destination. Separate buttons select level control, i.e. Video control only, Audio control only, both Video and Audio control, or no control. RPAN-8-8-2 Source
Destination
V
A
For use as a XY control panel with 2 router levels. 8 buttons are provided to select sources to the assigned destination. Another 8 buttons are provided to select the destination of interest. Separate buttons select level control, e.g. Video control, Audio control or both Video and Audio.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.2
RPAN
SECTION 4
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cross point control No user action will result in cross point changes except pressing a source button. Specifically, no cross point change will ever occur when the level or destination buttons are pressed, or when any configuration menus are changed. Cross point display At any time, the display of cross points on the panel will agree with the actual router cross point status. If the panel is unable to show cross points reliably for any reason, then the error-state of flashing red will be used to indicate this. This applies to both true connected and simulatedconnected polled-blind connections. Button colour usage
Off indicates not available, whether source, destination, or level.
Flashing Red
Flashing indicates a problem.
Source SRC SRC SRC 1 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
Green/orange flashing means communication are OK, but signal path problem.
This indicates the system is mis-configured or broken. Red always flashes, and can be bright or dim. Green. SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
SRC SRC 6 7
Orange means levels are split, i.e. for the current destination, the 2 routers being controlled by the two levels have different source selections. The level 1 button and level 1 source will be shown green, while the level 2 button and level 2 source will be shown orange.
Source SRC 1
Red flashing means system/communication error.
SRC 8
This indicates the system configured and working OK Bright green/orange Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
This indicates the currently selected source, destination, and/or level. Dim green This indicates a NOT currently selected source, destination, and/or level.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.3
RPAN
SECTION 4
FRONT PANEL OPERATION Based on the general principles of operation, this section shows a non-exhaustive list of typical operation conditions, and the LED display that would be seen. 1 Power Up At power up the LED’s in all buttons will flash red until communication is established with the router. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
1.2 Interrogate at power up. Once the panel is connected to the router, it will send an Interrogate message. At this stage, with no button press, the XY panel will remember the last destination before powering down. The router will reply with a Tally, which will update the status of the panel. Setting the LED in the button of the Source selected to Destination 0, to bright green, all other buttons to the background colour, (defined to be dim green). Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
2.1 Interrogate at user request. If the user changes Destination by pressing a button, in this case changing from TX1 to TX2. The panel will send an Interrogate message to find which Source is connected to Destination TX2. The router will reply with a Tally, which will update the status of the panel. Setting the LED in the button of the Source selected to Destination TX2, to bright green, all other Source buttons to the background colour. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
2.2 Interrogate video and audio non tracking. If the Video and Audio Routers have different Sources selected to the same Destination then the LED in the button for the Video Source will be bright Green and the LED in the buttons for the Audio Source & Audio Level will be Bright Orange. Source SRC 1
RPANOP
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
280606
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
www.snellwilcox.com
DST 8
Version 1 Issue 3
V
A
VID
AUD
4.4
RPAN
SECTION 4
3.1 Selection Audio follow Video. When a new Source is selected, by pressing a button, the panel will send a Connect message to both Video and Audio routers, requesting the source selected to be routed to that destination. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
3.2 Selection Audio only. Press the button marked Video on the right hand side of the panel. This will turn from Green to background colour to indicate the panel is no longer making selections on the Video Router. When a new Source is selected, by pressing a button, the panel will send a Connect message to Only the Audio router, requesting the source selected to be routed to that destination. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
3.3 Selection Video only. Press the button marked Audio on the right hand side of the panel. This will turn from Green to background colour to indicate the panel is no longer making selections on the Audio Router, ensure the Video button is bright green. When a new Source is selected, by pressing a button, the panel will send a Connect message to Only the Video router, requesting the source selected to be routed to that destination. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
4 Good Connection When the router establishes the requested path it will generate a Connected message. This contains details of the routed path and the status of the selected input. If the path was connected and the selected source had a valid input the LED in the last Source will be switched off and the LED in the new Source will be switched on. Source SRC 1
RPANOP
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
280606
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
www.snellwilcox.com
DST 8
Version 1 Issue 3
V
A
VID
AUD
4.5
RPAN
SECTION 4
5.1 Bad Connection Video. When the router establishes the requested path it will generate a Connected message. This contains details of the routed path and the status of the selected input. If the path was connected and the selected Video source did not have a valid input the LED in the last Source will be switched off and the LED in the new Source and the Video level button would flash. Where the router supports monitoring the input status independent of cross point selection, (true for IQDRT and IQBRT, but not true for IQDMX), then additionally the other source buttons would flash from their background colour of dim green if the corresponding router input does not have a valid input. However, the flashing of the level buttons will match only the current source selection, and will not be affected by the signal status of the other sources. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
5.2 Bad Connection Audio. When the router establishes the requested path it will generate a Connected message. This contains details of the routed path and the status of the selected input. If the path was connected and the selected Audio source did not have a valid input the LED in the last Source will be switched off and the LED in the new Source and the Audio button would flash. Source SRC 1
RPANOP
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
280606
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
www.snellwilcox.com
DST 8
Version 1 Issue 3
V
A
VID
AUD
4.6
RPAN
SECTION 4
6.1 No Connection Video. If communication with the Video router is lost, the panel will time out after waiting for the Connected message. Because the path was not connected, the LED in the last Source will be switched to flashing red, to indicate this was the last selected Source and beyond that system status is unknown. All other sources will show flashing dim red. The Video button will flash red to indicate it is the Video router that has lost communication. The destination button will flash red to show this is the destination that has the communication problem. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
6.2 No Connection Audio. If communication with the Audio router is lost, the panel will time out after 0.5 second waiting for the Connected message. Because the path was not connected LED in the last Source will be switched to flashing red, to indicate this was the last selected Source and beyond that system status is unknown. The Audio button will flash red to indicate it is the Audio router that has lost communication. Source SRC 1
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
DST 8
V
A
VID
AUD
7 Connection From Another Control Unit If another controlling unit changes a source connected to this destination the panel will receive the Connected message, output by the router on all control ports. This contains details of the routed path and the status of the selected input. If the path was connected and the selected source had a valid input the LED in the last Source will be switched off and the LED in the new Source will be switched on. . If the path was connected and the selected source did not have a valid input the LED in the last Source will be switched off and the LED in the new Source would flash. Source SRC 1
RPANOP
SRC SRC 2 3
SRC SRC 4 5
280606
Destination SRC SRC 6 7
SRC 8
DST 1
DST 2
DST 3
DST DST 4 5
DST 6
DST 7
www.snellwilcox.com
DST 8
Version 1 Issue 3
V
A
VID
AUD
4.7
RPAN
SECTION 4
BUTTON STATES Based on the general principles of operation, this section shows a non-exhaustive list of typical operation conditions, and the LED display that would be seen. Terminology for these tables: “Connection”/ “connected” refers to RollCall connection, whether true connected or simulated polled blind connection. Routed refers to target router cross point. “Bad” signal means that the panel is set to read the input status from the router, and has read that the signal is missing. “Not bad” signal means that either the panel has read from the router that the signal is OK, or that the panel is not set to read the input status from the router. N.B. if the panel is set to read the input status, but is unable to read it, then this counts as failed connection, and the system error state of flashing red would over-ride the green signal presence display. State of Source buttons This source routed to current destination at all current levels, not-bad signal, (either good or unknown) Source routed at all current levels, bad signal on at least 1 active level Source not routed to current destination at any current levels, or no levels active, not-bad signal Source not routed at any current levels, or no levels active, bad signal on at least 1 active level Source routed at level 1 only with both levels active, not-bad signal on level 1 Source routed at level 1 only with both levels active, bad signal on level 1 Source routed at level 2 only with both levels active, not-bad signal on level 2 Source routed at level 2 only with both levels active, bad signal on level 2 Unknown, i.e. RollCall connection failed, but last known source is this one Unknown, i.e. RollCall connection failed, but not last known source Source not configured for current destination and level, or no destination/level selected
Colour
Brightness Flash
Green
High
No
Green
High
Yes
Green
Low
No
Green
Low
Yes
Green Green Orange Orange Red Red
High High High High High Low
No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Off
Off
No
State of Destination buttons Active destination, connection OK at all current levels where configured, at least 1 level configured Inactive destination, connection OK at all current levels where configured, at least 1 level configured Active destination, connection failed at some current levels ***Inactive destination, connection failed at some current levels Destination not configured at any current level, or no levels selected
Colour Brightness Flash
State of Level buttons Level active, and connection OK at current destination for this level Level inactive, and connection OK at current destination for this level Level active, and connection failed at current destination for this level Level inactive, and connection failed at current destination for this level (Level 2 only:) Level active, and connection OK at current destination for this level, but source for this destination/level is different to source for same destination on level 1.
Green
High
No
Green
Low
No
Red Red Off
High Low Off
Yes Yes No
Colour Green Green Red Red
Brightness High Low High Low
Flash No No Yes Yes
Orange High
No
STATE OF ALL BUTTONS User has selected "WhereAmI" feature from RollCall Control. This allows the user to physically identify which panel they are remote controlling. Colour: Orange, Brightness: High, Flash: Yes. RollCall address clash detected. This network configuration error is detected on power up or on address change, if another unit on the network is currently using the chosen address for this unit. Colour: Alternating Red/Orange, Brightness: High, Flash: Yes.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.8
RPAN
SECTION 4 RollCall Control Templates for RPAN
Control Local This section shows how the control panel is configured to control modules. The default configuration is for: IQDRT8/IQBRT8/IQSRT00/IQSRT10. Other examples are shown on pages 11 and 12. The user needs to set the address of each module and also the command number and value offset that will switch the appropriate source for each destination. The RollCall Control Panel screens are shown below. The RollCall command value sent to the router will be equal to “Offset + Source Number – 1”. E.g. if value offset is 0, then for inputs 1 to 8, the values 0 to 7 will be sent. 8 Button Panels Configuration In this case only Level one is used as only one module is to be controlled per destination. The destination is selected by Panel Destination function. Information Window PSU1 and PSU2 status. Temperature. Voltages. Connection(s) status as either all OK, or not. Where all detail doesn’t fit, display menu line show more details, e.g. individual connection statuses for each of the 16 connections. (See destination setup menus.) PSU, temp, and voltage display can be modelled on new 3U gateway. Crosspoint Matrix Show column and row headers, i.e. Inp 1 2 3 4 etc.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.9
RPAN
SECTION 4
Control Level 1, Level 2 Non-configured destinations are greyed out, corresponding to button LED off and not selectable. It is allowed to have no active destinations, or exactly 1 active destination. Cross point source buttons for non-configured destinations are greyed out, (corresponding to button LED off and not selectable), and so are source buttons beyond the specified source count. It is allowed to have no active destinations, or 1 active destination, or 2 active destinations in the split dual-level case.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.10
RPAN
SECTION 4
Dest 1 to Dest 8 For each destination and level, the following parameters are set: Destination 1 to 8 Level 1 and 2 This section allows the parameters for the 8 destinations to be set. Enable
When selected the parameters will be enabled. Default is to selected.
Connection Status This will show the connection status. Blind or Connected, default is to Connected Address (RollCall) This function allows the address of the RollTrack compatible module to be entered for each of the router outputs. The full network address has three sets of numbers. The first set (0000) is the network segment code number. The second set (00) is the number identifying the (enclosure/mainframe) unit. The third set (00) is the slot (Port) number in the unit. To change the address, type the new destination in the text area and then select
(return)
(Preset) returns to the default destination 0000:00:00.
RPAN connected to BRT8/DRT8/SRT00/SRT10. No. Sources This shows the number of valid sources available to be selected for this destination. It may be set from 1 to 8 and preset is to 8. For example, if there are only 4 valid sources available they should be grouped together as a block and this function set to 4.This will prevent an invalid source from being selected. Used in conjunction with the Source Offset a particular number of grouped sources may be defined. Source Offset
Command (RollCall) This is the RollCall command number. The default as per IQDRT8 For details of the RollCall command numbers for specific units please contact your local Snell & Wilcox agent. Take Command
This shows the number of contiguous valid sources starting from source offset. The scrollbar allows numbers from 2 to 8 to be selected. e.g. if Offset = 0, and Number = 3, then sources 1, 2, 3 will be enabled, corresponding to command values 0, 1, 2. Default is to 0.
This is the RollCall Take command number. default as per DRT8
Connection Type
Enable
This function allows the connection to be either Connected or Blind.
When selected the Take Command will become enabled. Default is to not selected.
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.11
RPAN
SECTION 4
Dest 1 to Dest 8 (cont) Poll Time (applies to blind connection only) The scrollbar allows the Poll Time to be adjusted over the range of 1 second to 10 seconds in 0.1 second steps. Default is to 1 second. Status display: “Blind poll OK/Failed” or “Connection OK/Failed” or “Not Used”. The latter indicates no or incomplete configuration, e.g. zero rUnit, empty or 0 command numbers, or control check box disabled. Input Status This function allows various types of information concerning, the input status, to be selected. Read Input Status mode radio buttons: Off This is the default selection and when selected the function will not be active. All Sources
RPAN connected to BRT8/DRT8/SRT00/SRT10 in multi level configuration.
When enabled all sources will be selected. Current Source Only When enabled only the current source will be selected. Command This reads the Input Status Command Number, In “All Sources” mode, a contiguous block of command numbers will apply to inputs 1 to n, e.g. 188,189…. In “Current Source Only” mode, only the specified command number will be read. default as per DRT:188. Status This shows one character per input. Character “*” indicates this input is read as lost. Character “?” indicates there is no information for this input, (e.g. Current Source Only mode, or not configured, or connection failed.) Character n for source number indicates this input is read as OK. Examples: “123**6*8”, “????????”.
RPANOP
280606
“???4????”,
“***4”,
www.snellwilcox.com
RPAN connected to DMX4. Similar for DMX8/SRT20/SRT21.
Version 1 Issue 3
4.12
RPAN
SECTION 4
Setup This function allows various system functions to be set up. Logging If a logging device is attached to the RollCall network, certain information may be made available for logging. Server This item allows the Logging Server to be chosen and set up. Editable Name (Named Server)
Logger in Use
None If this item is checked the Logging function will be disabled. Any
Logging Options Log Power
If this item is checked Logging information will be sent to any Logger on the system. It is suggested that if there is only one server on the system, this option should be chosen. Named If this item is checked Logging information will only be sent to the server named in the name window. Log Server The Logging Server may be named by editing the text string in the text window.
If this item is checked the status of the power supplies will be sent to the selected Logger. Log Temperature If this item is checked the temperature status of the unit will be sent to the selected Logger. Log Connections If this item is checked Source/Destination connection data will be sent to the selected Logger. Network Name
symbol represents the Preset function and The will return the name to the default name. Selecting the
The Network may be given a name by typing in the text box.
symbol will save the new name. symbol represents the Preset function and The will return the name to the default name. Selecting the
RPANOP
280606
www.snellwilcox.com
symbol will save the new name.
Version 1 Issue 3
4.13
RPAN
SECTION 4
Setup (cont) RollCall Address Hex Switches When this function is enabled the settings of the Hex switches of the Gateway card will be read and the value shown in the information window. Inhibit Restart When this item is checked it will prevent the unit from being restarted whenever the Hex switch settings for the RollCall address are changed. Netshow This function allows a unit to be `hidden' from the network system. When the box is checked the previously selected unit will not appear in the Module List displayed on other control panels in the system. When the box is unchecked the unit will appear in the Module List displayed on other control panels in the system. Note that if a unit is `hidden' and control is required the unit's address should be changed using the Hex switches on the Remote Control Interface. Card. Permit Blind Control Blind Control is the ability to control a unit without a connection. Active Front Panels and RollCall PC programs use a RollCall connection to control a module. RollTrack (used for setting, for example, audio delay times to track video delays) does not use a connection, but just sets the delay. If a chassis fitted with modules which will be controlled by Blind Control (RollTrack and some third party remote control systems) then Permit Blind Control must be enabled. If Blind Control is not be used then Permit Blind Control may be disabled, giving protection against incorrectly set-up RollTrack source modules. Enable WhereAmI? When this function is checked the LED indicator on the front panel of the enclosure will flash. This is useful in a system where there could be a large number of enclosures in a particular area. Sometimes it may be necessary to locate a specific enclosure; this function allows visual identification of the box to be made.
RPANOP
280606
Monitor Whether PSU's Fitted If two power supply units are fitted (dual redundancy supply configuration) the Left PSU and the Right PSU items should be checked. If for some reason one of the power supplies is removed a warning will be displayed, indicating which power supply is missing. If only one power supply is fitted only the corresponding checkbox should be selected and the other cleared. Software version This reveals the version number of the software used. Build Number This reveals the build number of the hardware used. Serial Number This item shows the serial number of the unit.
www.snellwilcox.com
Version 1 Issue 3
4.14
VikinX Routers Since its introduction in 1996, the VikinX Compact range has dominated the marketplace through its simplicity, reliability and affordability. Today the product is one of the most deployed routing switchers in the world.
RELIABILITY
VIKINX SUBLIME
The range was followed by VikinX Modular, a range of
In 2006 we introduced VikinX Sublime, built to maintain and
modular routing products that has been built with reliability
extend our leadership in the market for small and medium
and affordability as the most important design criteria.
routing applications. VikinX Sublime raises the standard for reliability, affordability and flexibility in its segment.
The reliability of the router, due to fully redundant control architecture and extremely low power consumption are
The VikinX Sublime range offers the broadcast market the
the major reasons why the VikinX Modular product can be
most extensive range of matrix sizes available (8x8 to 64x64
found in the most mission critical applications.
and 128x2) and covers signal formats from analog video/ audio to HDTV also incorporating 1080p 3Gbps Single
UNMATCHED FLEXIBILITY
Link HD. In addition, VikinX Sublime provides many of the
Another reason is the unmatched flexibility of the VikinX
powerful control features that drove the VikinX Modular
Modular control system, offering control features far beyond
range to success.
other comparable routing systems. VikinX Sublime offers flexible routing solutions for general As the only system available with full TCP/IP connectivity,
purpose facilities and on-air routing as well as mobile outside
VikinX Modular reduces the capital expenses necessary to
broadcast applications and sophisticated A/V applications.
install the system down to a minimum.
EASY TO USE Reliability through design simplicity as well as easy to
Network Electronics’ VikinX System Configurator is
operate user interfaces keep the operational expenses at a
developed to eliminate the obstacles installers and
low level, thus resulting in low cost of ownership.
operators face when setting-up and configuring complex routing solutions. One of the latest examples for easy-
When adding the 256x256 VikinX Modular in 2006, the line
to-use software is the VikinX System Configurator that
of modular routing products offers a wide range of different
accommodates wizards and convenient drag & drop menus
frame sizes and signal formats covered.
comfortably guiding the operator through the installation process. Together with Network Electronics’ proven routing hardware, the control system with all its control panel options and software features provides probably the most comprehensive and reliable routing switcher products in the business.
VIKINX SUBLIME
VikinX Sublime
Marking a new era
VikinX Sublime offers the broadcast industry the most
KEY FEATURES
extensive range of matrix sizes available (8x8 to 64x64 and
t "OBMPHVFWJEFPBVEJP "&4 4%4%* & 45.GSPNYUPY t .VMUJGPSNBU)%4%*GSPNYUPYXJUITVQQPSUGPS(CQT%VBM Link HD t 4JOHMF-JOL(CQT)%GSPNYUPY t /POTRVBSFNBUSJYTJ[FTGSPNYUPY t 3FDMPDLJOHBOEOPOSFDMPDLJOH4%)%4%* t $POUSPMWJB&UIFSOFU 34 /FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT /$#
t 4QBDFTBWJOHDN JO GSBNFEFQUIBMMPXJOHGSPOUBOESFBSSBDL mount t 'MFYJCMFNBUSJYQBSUJUJPOJOH t 'MFYJCMFMPDBMBOEFYUFSOBMDPOUSPMQBOFMTXJUIQSPGFTTJPOBMCSPBEDBTU quality buttons t 1SPHSBNNBCMFCVUUPODPOmHVSBUJPO t &YUFSOBMDPOUSPMQBOFMTQSPWJEJOHNVMUJQVSQPTF(1*(10 t 6MUSBMPXQPXFS IJHISFMJBCJMJUZEFTJHO t %VBM%$QPXFSJOMFU t 3FEVOEBOUQPXFSTVQQMJFT CSJDLPSGSBNF XJUIGSPOUJOEJDBUPST t 4JHOBMEJBHOPTUJDT TJHOBMQSFTFODF SFDMPDLJOH &%)
t 4FBNMFTTJOUFSPQFSBCJMJUZXJUI7JLJO9.PEVMBSSPVUFST t 4ZODXJUIMPPQUISPVHI USJMFWFMPO)%SPVUFST t .PVOUJOHUSBZTGPSCSJDLQPXFSTVQQMZ
16x2 to 128x2) and covers signal formats from analogue video/audio to HDTV, with our SMPTE-292 HD products providing support for the 3Gbps dual link standard. A full range of 3Gbps single link HD products is available, underscoring our commitment to providing future-proofed products wherever possible. Flexible control solutions includes support for local and remote panels, equipped with professional broadcast quality programmable buttons. VikinX Sublime provides many of the powerful control features that have made the VikinX Modular range a success story. Control options such as serial control RS-232, Ethernet and Network Control Bus enable solutions from the VikinX Sublime range to fit into any application, from small production facilities up to large networks with centralized management through ETH-CON. In addition, numerous third party interface options allow the integration of VikinX Sublime at installations that employ proprietary vendor connectivity solutions. VikinX Sublime offers flexible routing solutions for general purpose facility and on-air routing as well as mobile outside broadcast applications and sophisticated A/V applications.
network-electronics.com
| 173
VIKINX SUBLIME
2.2 Analog Video SL-V6464
64x64
Dimensions: 483x176x50 mm (19”, 4RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-V6464-CP)
SL-V3232
32x32
Dimensions: 483x88x50 mm (19”, 2RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-V3232-CP)
t "OBMPH7JEFP3PVUFS t 1BSUJUJPOJOH GPSTRVBSFSPVUFSTPOMZ
t 4-7FYQBOEBCMFVQUPY t #VJMUJO$POUSPM1BOFM"WBJMBCMF t $POUSPMWJB*1&UIFSOFU 34 /$# t DN JO GSBNFEFQUIBMMPXJOHGSPOUBOESFBSSBDLNPVOU t 6MUSBMPXQPXFSIJHISFMJBCJMJUZEFTJHO t 3FEVOEBOUQPXFSTVQQMJFT CSJDLPSGSBNF XJUIGSPOUJOEJDBUPST t *OUFSPQFSBCJMJUZXJUI7JLJO9.PEVMBSSBOHFPGSPVUFST
SL-V1616
16x16
Dimensions: 483x44x50 mm (19”, 1RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-V1616-CP)
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency response
0–125MHz –3dB
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN 08x08, 16x16 32x32, 64x64
15dB (5MHz–540MHz) nom. 800mVp–p ±10% typ. 700ps
Connector AC power DC power
BNC External power supply 100–260 VAC ±15V, connector DB9 male
Non-reclocked routers(N)
SL-SD0808
8x8
Dimensions: 483x44x50 mm (19”, 1RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-SD0808N-CP and SL-SD0808R-CP (with re-clocking))
SL-SD1602
16x2
Dimensions: 483x44x50 mm (19”, 1RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-SD1602R-CP)
176 | network-electronics.com
VIKINX SUBLIME
3G-HD Digital Video
2.2
SL-3GHD6464
64x64
Dimensions: 483x176x50 mm (19”, 4RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-3GHD6464-CP)
SL-3GHD3232
32x32
Dimensions: 483x88x50 mm (19”, 2RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-3GHD3232-CP)
SL-3GHD1616
16x16
Dimensions: 483x44x50 mm (19”, 1RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-3GHD1616-CP)
t )JHI%FmOJUJPO7JEFP3PVUFS t "WBJMBCMFXJUIJOUFHSBUFEDPOUSPMQBOFM t .VMUJGPSNBU4%4%* )%4%*BOE()% t 3FDMPDLJOHPOBMMTUBOEBSEWJEFPSBUFT t 1BSUJUJPOJOH GPSTRVBSFSPVUFSTPOMZ
t 4JOHMFMJOL(CQT Q t $POUSPMWJB*1&UIFSOFU 34 /$# t DN JO GSBNFEFQUIBMMPXJOHGSPOUBOESFBSSBDLNPVOU t 6MUSBMPXQPXFSIJHISFMJBCJMJUZEFTJHO t 3FEVOEBOUQPXFSTVQQMJFT CSJDLPSGSBNF XJUIGSPOUJOEJDBUPST t *OUFSPQFSBCJMJUZXJUI7JLJO9.PEVMBSSBOHFPGSPVUFST t %7#"4*DPNQBUJCMF
SPECIFICATIONS
SL-3GHD0808
8x8
Dimensions: 483x44x50 mm (19”, 1RU) Also available with X-Y Control Panel integrated in the front (SL-3GHD0808-CP)
SL-3GHD1602
16x2
Data rate NRZ Reference input
143Mbps–2,970Gbps NTSC or PAL Black Burst or HD Tri-Level acc. to SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 276M
Equalization
0 to 100m @ 2,970Gbps, typical Belden 1694A
Impedance Return-loss in/out
75 ohm < –15dB, 5MHz –1.5GHz < –10dB, 1.5GHz –3GHz
Signal level Rise/fall time
Connector
nom. 800mVp-p ±10% 20%–80% – SD limit: 0.4ns-1.5ns, -100dB
Frequency response Crosstalk
20Hz-100kHz ±0.1dB > -100dB
Clicknoise THD+N SNR
typ. 90dB ref. to 0dB 20Hz-20kHz
Clicknoise THD+N SNR
< 60dBu < 0.005% > 90dB ref. to 0dB 20Hz-20kHz
Number of inputs
Number of inputs
32 (Stereo) electronically balanced
Input impedance
64 (Stereo) electronically balanced >10 kohm Max input level +23dBu
CMRR Max. input level Number of outputs
>75dB + 23dBu 64 (Stereo) electronically balanced
Input impedance Max input level CMRR
> 10kohm + 23dBu > 75dB
Output impedance Audio connector AC power
66 ohm DB25 female External power supply 100–260 VAC
Number of outputs Output impedance Audio connector
32 (Stereo) electronically balanced 66 ohm DB25 female
DC power Dimensions
±15V, connector DB9 male 483x264x100 mm (19”, 6RU)
AC power DC power Dimensions
External power supply 100–260 VAC ±15V, connector DB9 male 483x132x100 mm (19”, 3RU)
tL)["VEJP#BOEXJEUI t1PXFSEPXONFNPSZ t1SPHSBNNBCMFGPSNBU t34*OUFSGBDF t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t"MTPVTBCMFBT5JNF$PEFSPVUFS
A6464 is also available as mono. This unit is called A6464 Mono.
tL)["VEJP#BOEXJEUI t1PXFSEPXONFNPSZ t1SPHSBNNBCMFGPSNBU t34*OUFSGBDF t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t"MTPVTBCMFBT5JNF$PEFSPVUFS
network-electronics.com
| 205
VIKINX COMPACT
2.2 Component Analog Video
If our routers were any thinner We could ship them in envelopes
COMPONENT ANALOG VIDEO Everything you want in a compact feature-rich design, including: t 4FBNMFTTUSJTUFQTXJUDIJOH t &YUFSOBMDPOUSPMTZTUFNDPNQBUJCJMJUZ t 5ZQo.)[E#!E#NJOQVUTJHOBM t "VEJPCSFBLBXBZQPTTJCMF t 6QUPYSFTPMVUJPO t #VJMUJO34JOUFSGBDF t #VJMUJOQSPGFTTJPOBMDPOUSPMQBOFM Available in configurations of RGBHV, plus stereo analog audio. Sizes include 16x16, 16x8, 8x8, 8x4.
CONFIGURATIONS The following formats may be configured (analog stereo audio and built-in control panel are both optional):
206 | network-electronics.com
16x16
RGBHV + AA + CP
16x8
RGBHV + AA + CP
8x8
RGBHV + AA + CP
8x4
RGBHV + AA + CP
VIKINX COMPACT
Component Analog Video
2.2
CAV0808 / CAV0804
CAV1616 / CAV1608
8x8 / 8x4
16x16 / 16x8
VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS Frequency response Number of inputs Number of outputs
VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS typical 0–110MHz / -3dB @ 0dBm input signal 8 8 or 4, depending on model
AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL) Number of inputs Number of outputs
8 (Stereo), true balanced 8 or 4 (Stereo), depending on model, all true balanced
GENERAL
Number of inputs Number of outputs
typical 0–130MHz / -3dB @ 0dBm input signal 16 16 or 8, depending on model
AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL) Number of inputs Number of outputs
16 (Stereo), true balanced 16 or 8 (Stereo), depending on model, all true balanced
GENERAL
Max. power consumption Dimensions
Frequency response
Max. power consumption 100dB ref. to 0db 20Hz-20kHz > 10k ohm > 75dB
Return loss Max signal Coupling
typical 38dB 2 Vp-p DC
Max. Input level Output impedance Connector
+ 25dBu 66 ohm DB25 female
DC offset Propagation delay Connector
typ. 5mV 5ns ± 1ns BNC
PANEL SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)
Switching
Seamless w/variable delay 2-5s, or VIT, selectable via DIP-switches. PAL/NTSC selection on DIP-switches. VIT loop
GENERAL
Salvos
Programmable/executable on panel
AC Power
External power supplies 100 – 260 VAC
DC Power
±15V, connector DB9 male, equipped with 2x DB9 connectors
network-electronics.com
| 207
VIKINX COMPACT
2.2 SD Digital Video VD6464
VD3232
64x64
32x32
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Data rate NRZ
143Mbps–540Mbps
Data rate NRZ
143Mbps–540Mbps
VIT Input Equalization Impedance
Comp. Video 1Vpp, 300mV sync, 75ohm Automatic up to 300m (Belden 8281) 75 ohm
VIT Input
Comp. Video 1Vpp, 300mV sync, looped, 75ohm
Return loss in/out Signal level Rise/fall time
> 18dB (10MHz–270MHz) nom. 800mV typ. 700ps
Equalization Impedance Return loss in/out
Automatic up to 300m (Belden 8281) 75 ohm > 18dB (10MHz–270MHz)
Signal level
nom. 800mV
Connector AC power DC power
BNC External power supply 100–260 VAC +5V, connector DB9 male
Rise/fall time Connector AC power
typ. 700ps BNC External power supply 100–260 VAC
Dimensions
483x264x100 mm (19”, 6RU)
DC power Dimensions
+5V, connector DB9 male 483x132x100 mm (19”, 3RU)
t%.CQT$PNQPOFOU t.CQT/54$$PNQPTJUF t%.CQT1"-$PNQPTJUF t6QUP.CQT%BUBSBUF t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t1PXFSEPXONFNPSZ t34*OUFSGBDF t%7#"4*DPNQBUJCMF
208 | network-electronics.com
t%.CQT$PNQPOFOU t.CQT/54$$PNQPTJUF t%.CQT1"-$PNQPTJUF t6QUP.CQT%BUBSBUF t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t1PXFSEPXONFNPSZ t34*OUFSGBDF t%7#"4*DPNQBUJCMF
VIKINX COMPACT
Digital Audio
2.2
AD6464-110
AD3232-110
64x64
32x32
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Signal type Number of inputs Input impedance Number of outputs Output impedance Jitter
AES/EBU digital audio 64 transformer balanced 110 ohm 64 transformer balanced 110 ohm 800ps
Delay Signal level Sampling rates Switching mode Audio connector AC power DC power
170ns 0.2 – 7Vpp 32 – 96kHz Asynchronous DB25 female External power supply 100 or 260 VAC +5V, connector DB9 male
Dimensions
483x132x100 mm (19”, 3RU)
Also available as unbalanced 75 ohm (AD6464-75)
t PINCBMBODFEJOBOEPVUQVUT t L)[DPNQBUJCMF t 4BNQMJOHSBUFToL)[ t 1PXFS%PXO.FNPSZ t 1SPHSBNNBCMFGPSNBU t /FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t 34*OUFSGBDF
Signal type Number of inputs Input impedance Number of outputs Output impedance Jitter Delay
AES/EBU digital audio 32 transformer balanced 110 ohm 32 transformer balanced 110 ohm 800ps 170ns
Signal level Sampling rates Switching mode Audio connector AC power
0.2 – 7Vpp 32 – 96kHz Asynchronous DB25 female External power supply 100 or 260 VAC +5V, connector DB9 male 483x132x100 mm (19”, 3RU)
DC power Dimensions
Also available as unbalanced 75 ohm (AD3232-75)
t PINCBMBODFEJOBOEPVUQVUT t L)[DPNQBUJCMF t 4BNQMJOHSBUFToL)[ t 1PXFS%PXO.FNPSZ t 1SPHSBNNBCMFGPSNBU t /FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t 34*OUFSGBDF
network-electronics.com
| 209
VIKINX COMPACT
2.2 Telecom T6464-34/45
T3232-34/45
64x64
32x32
t.CQTPS.CQT%BUBSBUF t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t0VUQVU3FDMPDLJOH t.FFUT*565(GPS)%#TJHOBMT t34*OUFSGBDF t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Data rate
34Mbps – 45Mbps G.703 HDB3
Data rate
34Mbps–45Mbps G.703 HDB3
Equalization Impedance Re-clocking
Automatic, up to 200m (Belden 8281) 75 ohm On outputs
Equalization Re-clocking Impedance
Automatic up to 200m (Belden 8281) on outputs 75 ohm
Return loss Signal level Connector
> 16dB (10MHz–270MHz) 1000 mV fixed, 75 ohm load BNC
Return-loss Signal level Connector
> 16dB 1000mV fixed on 75 ohm load BNC
AC Power DC Power Max power consumption
External power supplies 100–260 VAC ±5V, connector DB9 male < 17.5W
AC power Power option DC power
External power supply 100–260 VAC 24–72V DC ±5V, connector DB9 male
Dimensions
483x616x120 mm (19”, 14RU)
Dimensions
483x308x100 mm (19”, 7RU)
t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t34*OUFSGBDF
210 | network-electronics.com
t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t34*OUFSGBDF
VIKINX COMPACT
Telecom
2.2
T6464-140/155
T3232-140/155
64x64
32x32
t.CQTPS.CQT%BUBSBUF t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/PO3FDMPDLJOH t.FFUT*565(GPS$.*TJHOBMT t34*OUFSGBDF t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Data rate
140Mbps – 155Mbps G.703 CMI
Data rate
140Mbps–155Mbps G.703 CMI
Equalization Impedance Return loss
Automatic, up to 200m (Belden 8281) 75 ohm > 16dB (10MHz – 270MHz)
Equalization Impedance Return-loss
Automatic up to 200m (Belden 8281) 75 ohm > 16dB
Signal level Connector AC Power
1000 mV fixed, 75 ohm load BNC External power supplies 100–260 VAC
Signal level Connector AC power
1000mV fixed on 75 ohm load BNC External power supply 100–260 VAC
DC Power Max power consumption Dimensions
+5V, 2 pin Molex Connector < 80W 483x264x120 mm (19”, 6RU)
Power option DC power Dimensions
24–72V DC +5V, connector DB9 male 483x132x100 mm (19”, 3RU)
t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t34*OUFSGBDF
t*OQVU&RVBMJ[BUJPO t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT t34*OUFSGBDF
network-electronics.com
| 211
VIKINX COMPACT
2.2 RS-422 Data D3232
32x32
SPECIFICATIONS Data rate Connector AC Power DC Power
5Mbps DB9 female External power supply 100–260VAC +5V, connector DB9 male
Dimensions
483x220x35 mm (19”, 5RU)
t.BDIJOFBOEFEJUDPOUSPM t4UBUFPGUIFBSURVBMJUZ t1PXFSEPXONFNPSZ t'PSQSPEVDUJPOTZTUFNT t34*OUFSGBDF t/FUXPSL$POUSPM#VT
212 | network-electronics.com
2.2
network-electronics.com
| 213
VIKINX ACCESSORIES
2.2 VikinX Accessories All Network Electronics products have a single desktop power supply included in the unit price. Below you will find some options for single or redundant power supply in 19”-2RU.
Order no. FR-PWR-1S
Description: Frame, 1 x Motherboard and 1 x Power Supply, handles up to 5 VikinX devices
FR-PWR-1R
Frame, 1 x Motherboard and 2 x Power Supplies, handles up to 5 VikinX devices Frame, 2 x Motherboards and 2 x Power Supplies, handles up to 10 VikinX devices
FR-PWR-2S FR-PWR-2R FR-PWR-3S FR-PWR-3R FR-PWR-4S FR-PWR-4R
Frame, 2 x Motherboards and 4 x Power Supplies, handles up to 10 VikinX devices Frame, 3 x Motherboards and 3 x Power Supplies, handles up to 15 VikinX devices Frame, 3 x Motherboards and 6 x Power Supplies, handles up to 15 VikinX devices Frame, 4 x Motherboards and 4 x Power Supplies, handles up to 20 VikinX devices Frame, 4 x Motherboards and 8 x Power Supplies, handles up to 20 VikinX devices
Specify Power Cables (quantity of each type) when ordering FR-PWR-xx. See below.
19”-2RU power supply frame can be equipped with up to 4 Motherboards, where each Motherboard can house up to 2 power supplies (single or redundant) of all VikinX equipment (routers, amplifiers, converters) up to the VikinX.32 Router Family, as well as AD6464-110 and A6464 Mono. For A6464 Stereo, please specify PSU’s for each Mono frame!
Power Cables for FR-PWR-xx DC-DC-+/-5V Cable, 1,5m (5 ft.), interconnects FR-PWR-xx and VikinX devices +/-5V Typical products: VIDEO DC-DC-+/-15V Cable, 1,5m (5 ft.), interconnects FR-PWR-xx and VikinX devices +/-15V Typical products: AUDIO FR-PWR-2R-V Rack mount Redundant PSU solution for V6464 and AD-6464-75. Frame, 2 x Motherboards and 4 x Power Supplies, incl. dedicated DC/DC PSU-Router cable FR-PWR-3R-VD Rack mount Redundant PSU solution for VD6464. Frame, 3 x Motherboards and 6 x Power Supplies, incl. dedicated DC/DC PSURouter cable
Each motherboards have 5 DC power outlets. GPI Alarm per power supply included. Each power supply gives 60W. Autosensing
UPGRADE AND SPARE PARTS MODULES
100-240VAC. Please call for 48V DC solutions. Note that all routers and control panels are supplied with single desktop power supply as standard.
Power Supply Module for FR-PWR-xx PWR-AC Power supply with 2 x 15V and 2 x 5V, 60W, 15/15/5/5V input 110-260VAC auto-sensing, for spare or redundant supply PWR-DC Power supply with 2 x 15V and 2 x 5V, 60W, input 15/15/5/5V 36-72VDC, for spare or redundant supply
BACKPLANE FOR POWER SUPPLY MODULES FOR FR-PWR-XX BCK-PL
Backplane for Power Supply Modules for FRPWR-xx, can hold 2 x PSU modules
FAN FR-Fan-1RU
PWR-AC15/15/5/5V
214 | network-electronics.com
Fan for ventilation, 1 RU. Please call for further instructions.
VIKINX ACCESSORIES
VikinX Accessories DESKTOP POWER SUPPLY UNITS (PSU) NUMBER
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
2.2 ACCESSORIES Y-cable, for redundant power
AC DESKTOP POWER FOR VIKINX SUBLIME 12876
SL-PWR-90
For SL-HD6464-R/-CP, SL-SD6464R/-CP, SL-A6464/-CP , SL-A3232/-CP, SL-V6464/-CP
TOOL-KIT RJ45-NCB
12450
SL-PWR-40
For all other Sublime Routers
RJ45-NCB-ADP
AC DESKTOP POWER FOR VIKINX COMPACT 12450
SL-PWR-40
For A3232, A6464 Mono A6464 (1 router requires 2 units. Must be ordered separately)
16675
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For AD3232-75, AD3232-110, AD6464-75, AD6464-110
12450
SL-PWR-40
For CAV0804, CAV0808, CAV1608, CAV1616, incl. Variants
16675
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
16675 16675
DB25Pin Adaptor
A necessary item to combine two power supplies for redundancy Connector Matchbox (adapter) between RJ45 and NCB (Network Control Bus), incl. 2 x NCB 0.3 and 2 x RJ45-RJ45-0.3 Connector Matchbox (adapter) between RJ45 and NCB (Network Control Bus) Small print-card with DB25 to screw-terminal
NCB-BUS CABLE INCL. CONNECTORS NCB-0,3 NCB-1,5
NCB (Network Control Bus) 0.3 meter cable NCB (Network Control Bus) 1.5 meter cable
For D3232
NCB-3,0 NCB-7,5
NCB (Network Control Bus) 3.0 meter cable NCB (Network Control Bus) 7.5 meter cable
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For RECL8
NCB-15
NCB (Network Control Bus) 15 meter cable
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For T3232-140/155, T3232-34/45, T6464-34/45
NCB-25
NCB (Network Control Bus) 25 meter cable
11082
DP AC +5V / 110W
For T6464-140/155 (For redundant power, choose FR-PWR-3R-VD)
NCB-50 NCB-xx
NCB (Network Control Bus) 50 meter cable NCB (Network Control Bus) longer lengths
16675
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For V3232, V6464
16675
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For VD3232
11082
DP AC +5V / 110W
For VD6464 (For redundant power, choose FR-PWR-3R-VD)
AC DESKTOP POWER FOR CONTROL PANELS 12450
SL-PWR-40
For Sublime Panels
16675
DP AC +/-5V / 35W
For IP Panels
11079
DP AC +/-5V / 10W
For Compact Panels
AUDIO DB25 TO XLR 3m x XLRF-25pin 3m x XLRM-25pin
Network DB25pin Audio Contact to 8 x XLRF (Female), 3 meter cable Network DB25pin Audio Contact to 8 x XLRF (Male), 3 meter cable
AC DESKTOP POWER FOR 1 RU FLASHLINK COMPACT DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS 11084
DP AC +/-15V / 10W
For AV0110, A0108DS
11079
DP AC +/-5V / 10W
For AD0108Q, V0106Q, V0106DEQ, SDI0106Q
AC DESKTOP POWER FOR N-BOX 11084
DP AC +/-15V / 10W
For N-BOX (or use SL-PWR-40!)
DC DESKTOP POWER FOR VIKINX COMPACT 11081
DP DC +/-15V / 30W
For A3232, A6464 Mono A6464 (1 router requires 2 units. Must be ordered separately)
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For AD3232-75, AD3232-110, AD6464-75, AD6464-110
11081
DP DC +/-15V / 30W
For CAV0804, CAV0808, CAV1608, CAV1616, incl. Variants
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For D3232
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For RECL8
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For T3232-140/155, T3232-34/45, T6464-34/45
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For V3232, V6464 (For redundant power, choose FR-PWR-2R-V)
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For VD3232
DC DESKTOP POWER FOR CONTROL PANELS 11081
DP DC +/-15V / 30W
For Sublime Panels
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For IP Panels
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For Compact Panels
DC DESKTOP POWER FOR 1 RU FLASHLINK COMPACT DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS 11081
DP DC +/-15V / 30W
For AV0110, A0108DS
11080
DP DC +/-5V / 30W
For AD0108Q, V0106Q, V0106DEQ, SDI0106Q
DC DESKTOP POWER FOR N-BOX 11081
DP DC +/-15V / 30W
For N-BOX
network-electronics.com
| 215
Multiformat, Multistandard Waveform Rasterizers WVR7120 • WVR7020 • WVR6020 Data Sheet Numerical and graphical display of A/V delay for analog, digital, and Dolby audio formats Simultaneous A/B input support to extend monitoring functions High-performance physical layer measurements are essential to resolve difficult troubleshooting tasks CaptureVu® advanced video capture simplifies troubleshooting of intermittent errors Monitoring of three user-defined Vertical Ancillary (VANC) data types on the Auxiliary Data Status display – including user-definable names for the three VANC data packets with reference to their respective DID/SDID values Simultaneous monitoring of 16 channels of embedded AES audio on the audio level bar display. Option AD, DDE, or DPE required Preset Save Confirmation Exceptional audio monitoring with options for analog, digital, and Dolby Digital, Dolby E, and Dolby Digital Plus Tektronix See and Solve™ displays facilitate compliance verification with FlexVu™, the most powerful four-tile display available Note: LCD display not included.
SNMP and Ethernet remote interface capabilities to facilitate centralized monitoring and control Instrument presets for quick recall of commonly used configurations
Features & Benefits
Digital cursors for precise time and amplitude measurement
The WVR7x20 Series offers Dual Link, SD, HD, analog video, and audio monitoring options in one platform
Teletext decode and display capability helps operators quickly verify these data services
The WVR7120 measurement and monitoring options provide a flexible range of configurations to maximize productivity Industry-leading Loudness monitoring capabilities Loudness Trend Chart with adjustable display window Simultaneous CEA608 and CEA708 Closed Caption monitoring Adjustable Dolby Guard Band limits with Dolby Guard Band metering Automatic Format Description (AFD) detection with automatic graticule display Broadcast Flag/CGMS detection Black/Frozen picture detect
Standard and user-definable Safe Area Graticules facilitate editing tasks reducing the need for reworks and format conversions
Applications Monitoring and compliance checking in content distribution and broadcasting Quality control in the content production and post production Equipment qualification and troubleshooting in the installation and maintenance of content creation and distribution facilities and systems
Data Sheet
your investment. For complete details regarding option and feature availability by model please refer to the section of this document on ordering information.
WVR7020 The WVR7020 provides an ideal solution for basic monitoring of Analog, Digital, SD, HD, and Multiple Audio formats. This flexible solution comes standard with SD-SDI video monitoring and can be equipped with options and upgrades to monitor different combinations of HD-SDI, Dual Link, and Composite Analog video. WVR7020 is an intelligent choice that prepares you for format transitions, growing with your needs. Available audio options include support for Analog, AES/EBU, Embedded, Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby E formats.
WVR6020 Multiformat support grows with your needs
The WVR6020 offers performance monitoring capabilities for SD and Analog Video formats.
WVR7120
The AD audio option available for WVR6020 offers monitoring for Analog and Digital Embedded or AES/EBU audio.
Precision and leading-edge capabilities such as Physical Layer Measurement, Patented See and Solve™ Displays, CaptureVu, A/V Delay Monitoring, and Simultaneous Input Display make Tektronix the brand of choice for applications that require deep signal analysis and unquestionable accuracy. The WVR7120 features the complete range of options of the product family and comes standard with SD video. It provides high-performance monitoring and measurement for applications from Analog Composite to SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and Dual Link video inputs with support for a variety of audio formats: Video Monitoring DL (Dual Link) HD (High Definition SDI) SD (Standard Definition SDI) CPS (Composite Analog) Audio Monitoring AD (AES, Embedded, and Analog) DDE (Dolby Digital and Dolby E) DPE (Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby E) Measurement and Analysis EYE, PHY (Physical Layer) SIM (Simultaneous Inputs) AVD (A/V Delay) This instrument supports flexible combinations of options and upgrades, providing an excellent solution for multiformat environments while protecting
2
www.tektronix.com
Available monitoring options include Composite and Analog/Digital Audio.
From Analog to Advanced Digital Video in One Platform Ideal for multiformat environments, the Tektronix family of waveform rasterizers provides flexible options and field-installable upgrade kits to monitor diverse video types including Dual Link, SD/HD-SDI, and Composite Analog. The WVR7020 and WVR7120 Option DL features Dual Link SMPTE 372M compliant monitoring with SMPTE 352M automatic format detection and selectable display of Alpha Channel. The latest WVR7x20 firmware includes monitoring for 2K Dual Link with XYZ Color Space on Option DL. These instruments allow for monitoring of link A, B, or the combined input with a comprehensive set of displays and status report tools. The Tektronix Timing display proves a valuable ally in maintaining correct timing between links A and B. This simple indication on the Timing display confirms the links are correctly connected. Monitoring display modes such as Waveform, Vector, Gamut, Timing, Status, and Audio are available for the monitoring of Dual Link and other formats. Each WVR7x20 Series instrument supports any combination of video and audio format options, so the platform excels on multiformat environments and evolves with your needs to protect your investment.
Multiformat, Multistandard Waveform Rasterizers — WVR7120 • WVR7020 • WVR6020
See and Solve™ displays detect and address problems quickly and efficiently
FlexVu™, the display that adapts to your work practices
See and Solve™ with Tektronix Displays
The patented Tektronix Diamond, Split Diamond, and Arrowhead gamut displays simplify the process of verifying gamut compliance.
Tektronix See and Solve™ displays simplify video monitoring tasks such as calibration, error detection, and content correction allowing users to detect errors at a glance and troubleshoot them efficiently. Specialized session and status displays provide summarized, yet comprehensive reports of conditions and measurements of content parameters. The powerful Error Log is configurable and provides detailed reports for up to 10,000 events which can be downloaded using a web browser. Alarms can also activate ground closures and SNMP traps simplifying centralized monitoring of multiple programs. The FlexVu™ four-tile display provides maximum flexibility to increase your productivity. Unlike instruments with predetermined view combinations or limited choices, FlexVu™ lets you create a multiview display tailored to your specific needs and work practices. Each tile can be configured to enable easy signal analysis such as multiple alarm and status screens, different Safe Area Graticules and cursors on each tile, and more. Tektronix displays offer the sharpest CRT-like trace quality for clear waveform monitoring without pixelation distortions.
The Diamond and Split Diamond displays help easily identify and correct RGB gamut errors in digital video signals. The Arrowhead display saves time in verifying composite gamut compliance on analog and digital video signals. User-selectable gamut thresholds let you tailor these displays and the associated gamut alarms to your particular compliance standards. You can also select bright-up conditions to see the location of gamut errors on the picture display. The picture display can simultaneously detect and decode CEA608/708 Closed Caption. Teletext subtitle pages can also be decoded in either 625 formats or using OP47 Ancillary data. Flexible Safe Area Graticules allow for quick placement of graphics, titles, or logos. Using FlexVu™, users can see two or more pictures with different graticules or closed caption displays. Screen captures can be made through the local network. These can be initiated: 1. Manually 2. Automatically at specified intervals 3. By an error trigger
www.tektronix.com
3
Data Sheet
Physical Layer options provide precise measurements and powerful displays
Simultaneous Display, virtually two instruments in one
Top Reliability on Physical Layer Measurements
Simultaneous Input Display Boosts Monitoring Versatility
Tektronix is the technological leader for eye/jitter measurement solutions.
Option SIM takes multiformat monitoring to a new level.
Option EYE and PHY provide unique capabilities such as reporting jitter levels above 1 UI and jitter filters from 10 Hz to 100 kHz.
This capability helps operational staff quickly determine if a video quality problem existed in the input signal or arose in their facility. It lets engineering staffs quickly detect, diagnose, and resolve technical problems introduced by a piece of video equipment by quickly comparing the input and output signals at each point of a chain.
An easy-to-interpret gauge provides direct readout for jitter measurements. The user can configure timing and alignment readouts to be displayed simultaneously to effectively isolate the sources of jitter. The SDI Signal Status display summarizes key signal parameters such as signal strength, cable loss, and estimated cable length measurements.
This feature is especially helpful when checking for transparency during format conversion or for comparison of simulcast HD and SD programs.
Additionally, Option PHY provides exclusive Tektronix jitter waveform displays to view the jitter related to line and field rates. This option automatically measures eye amplitude, rise/fall time, and overshoot/undershoot.
FlexVu™ enables flexible and intuitive configuration of displays from two monitored inputs. With WVR7120 Option SIM, you can display simultaneous fault detection, status reporting, alarm generation, and error logging.
With FlexVu™, you can simultaneously display timing and alignment jitter values, cable parameter measurements, and display different eye patterns to help quickly diagnose and resolve problems related to SDI timing jitter or cable attenuation.
The patented Tektronix Timing display can be used for each source to time each input relative to the reference or measure the timing between each input.
4
www.tektronix.com
Audio and video signals can be displayed independently for each input.
Multiformat, Multistandard Waveform Rasterizers — WVR7120 • WVR7020 • WVR6020
Specialized tools like CaptureVu™ provide detailed content analysis
Aux Status Display
Monitoring of Auxiliary Data
for the picture display of the waveform monitor along with the binary data and text description.
New tools to monitor Ancillary data are now available on the WVR6020, WVR7020, and WVR7120 instruments.
Option DDE enables the display of VANC Dolby in Dolby Status display.
With FlexVu each tile can display different CEA608/708 Closed Caption and individual Teletext subtitles or pages. The Auxiliary Data display decodes Ancillary data such as Active Format Description (ARIB information and aspect ratio that can be monitored using Active Format Descriptor, Video Index, or WSS) and ARIB information.
CaptureVu™, standard on WVR7120, captures the data of a video frame to recreate any trace display and analyze its digital structure. Captured data can be downloaded through the Ethernet port, using a web browser.
Aux Data Status provides summary information on a variety of metadata such as CEA608 or CEA708 Closed Caption, Broadcast Flag/CGMS, Teletext, ARIB, Time Code, Active Format Description (AFD), Video Index Aspect Ratio, and Wide Screen Signaling.
Asset protection using the Broadcast Flag/CGMS – A presence is displayed in the Aux Status display.
Today there is a wide variety of metadata providing information to various equipment through the processing chain. Monitoring of this metadata is critical to ensure that the processing equipment correctly handles the signal. For instance, correct format of the AFD ensures that the aspect ratio on the display is correctly formatted and automatic graticule display is available
AFD Detection on Aux Status display, with automatic graticule and descriptive information in the picture display.
Monitoring of three user-defined Vertical Ancillary (VANC) data packets on the Auxiliary Data.
Black/Frozen Picture Detect (Alarm only) The Black and Frozen frame alarm detect can be used to alert the operator to a problem in the transmission chain. These and other errors can automatically be logged in the error log and provided as a report.
www.tektronix.com
5
Data Sheet
Loudness Meter
User-selectable Time Intervals
Loudness Monitoring Measure Loudness and true peaks per ITU-R BS.1770/1771 and ATSC RP A/85 recommendations Measure Loudness and true peaks of combination of discrete audio channels Measure Loudness of Dolby D, Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby E audio channels Measure Loudness using infinite or short-term measurement techniques per ITU-R-BS.1770-1 specifications, and display both values simultaneously (user-selectable integration time in increment of seconds for short-term measurements) Start/Stop capability for the duration of the segment, showing infinite and short-term measurements Audio Loudness Session
Simultaneously display Dialnorm value from Dolby metadata and the measured Loudness value on the same display Loudness measurement value in LKFS per ITU-R-BS.1770 Loudness meter is available on the audio-level meter display
Trend Analysis Features Loudness Trend Chart with adjustable display window Storage of Loudness measurement values to USB or through Web UI
User-selectable Vertical Scaling
6
www.tektronix.com
Multiformat, Multistandard Waveform Rasterizers — WVR7120 • WVR7020 • WVR6020
Comprehensive surround, Dolby, loudness, and channel status
Timing and Lightning displays simplify timing tasks
Monitoring Tools for Optimum Sound Quality
Facility Timing Made Easy
The WVR Series provides high-quality digital filtering and oversampling to insure precise, reliable, and repeatable audio measurements.
Audio/Video synchronization is an important challenge in the processing of video materials.
For easy monitoring, the WVR audio options provide format auto-detection and flexible mapping of audio inputs to analog or digital audio outputs for connection to external devices.
Option AVD displays the A/V delay on a graphical bar indicator. The measurement readout gives facility engineers the tool to insure system integrity and facilitate A/V delay compliance.
The Tektronix Surround Display*1 provides an excellent means for viewing special audio relationships.
This option provides out-of-service measurement of A/V delay for analog or digital audio and video formats.
Specialized audio displays provide deeper insight of the signal. The audio session display summarizes levels, faults, and number of active bits for each channel. The user can select from three loudness filters: flat, A-weighted, and RLB (BS.1770). These instruments also feature Audio Control Packet Data and Channel Status displays.
A TG700 is typically used/required to generate the SDI signal which contains the audio and video sequence that can be distributed through the system and measured by the waveform monitor.
The Dolby Status display (in Option DDE) gives an in-depth view of integrated or VANC metadata and Dolby E Guard Band A/V timing and synchronization. User-configurable threshold for the Dolby E Guard Band timing measurement (WVR7120/7020 Option DDE): The user can monitor the Dolby E Guard Band timing and trigger alarms based on their specific guard band parameters.
The patented Tektronix Timing display makes facility timing easy through a simple graphical representation which shows the relative timing of the input signal and reference signal on an X-Y axis. The Lightning display shows luma and chroma amplitudes and helps you verify component timing using a color bar header signal. The SCH Phase display helps quickly verify the relationship of the subcarrier to H sync. composite analog video signals.
Simultaneous monitoring of 16 channels of embedded AES audio on the audio level bar display – with Option AD or DDE. *1 Audio Surround Sound Display licensed from RadioTechnische Werksütten GmbH and Co. KG (RTW).
www.tektronix.com
7
Data Sheet
Characteristics Serial Digital Video Interface Vertical Measurement Accuracy –
At 1X gain, ±0.5% of 700 mV full ±1% all gain settings scale. At 5X gain, ±0.2% of 700 mV full scale. Gain – 1X, 5X, variable.
Range 1X, 5X, variable. Range 0.25X to >7.5X. Frequency Response – WVRFP provides flexibility for remote monitoring applications
Remote Interfaces Facilitate Centralized Monitoring The WVR Series instruments can be remotely accessed and controlled through a remote front panel, web interface, ground closures, and SNMP, helping users to integrate these instruments into a variety of remote monitoring applications. The remote front panel, WVRRFP, with the same user interface as the front panel on the instrument, allows operators to access and control the base unit from a distance of up to 100 feet. Users can control the WVR from the base unit and from the remote front panel simultaneously. Through the Ethernet port, users have full control of the monitoring functions and download the alarm log and for detailed analysis or record keeping. This feature allows users to control an unlimited number of WVR instruments from a single Windows computer through a web browser. The SNMP interface allows easy integration with network management software and advanced remote operation through a MIB browser. For applications in design and manufacturing or master control, this capability also enables automated tasks managed by an SNMP script.
SD: Luminance (Y) channel ±0.5% Flat to 5.75 MHz, ±1% to 5.75 MHz, Color Difference channels (Pb, Pr) ±0.5% to 2.75 MHz. HD: Luminance (Y) channel ±0.5% to 30 MHz, Color Difference channels (Pb, Pr) ±0.5% to 15 MHz. Inputs – Two. The input auto-detects between HD and SD signals WVR7x20 (Option
HD). Option SIM – Enables two active channel configurations. Input Type – Passive loopthrough BNC, 75 Ω compensated. Input Level – 800 mV, ±10%. Return Loss –
≥25 dB from 1 MHz to 270 MHz (typical) (power on). ≥15 dB from 1 MHz to 270 MHz (typical) (power off). >15 dB from 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz (typical) (power on). >10 dB from 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz (typical) (power off). Loopthrough Insertion Loss – For HD, equivalent to 10 m of type 8281 cable. Loopthrough Isolation – >50 dB to 300 MHz. Receiver Equalization Range –
Typically: for SD, to 250 m of type 8281 cable. for HD, to 100 m of type 8281 cable.
Composite Video Interface (Option CPS) Only available at time of the original order, not as an upgrade Formats Supported – NTSC, NTSC no setup; PAL. Inputs – Two, only one active at a time. Option SIM enables simultaneous monitoring
of two SDI signals or one composite and one SDI channel. Input Type – Passive loopthrough BNC, 75 Ω compensated. Input Dynamic Range – ±6 dB. Maximum Operating Amplitude – –1.8 V to +2.2 V, DC + peak AC. Absolute Maximum Input Voltage – –6.0 V to +6.0 V, DC + peak AC. DC Input Impedance – 15 kΩ, nominal. Return Loss – >40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz, inputs and power on, typical 35 dB with
power off. Crosstalk between Channels – >60 dB to 6 MHz. Loopthrough Isolation – >70 dB to 6 MHz. DC Offset with Restore On – 95% attenuation. Slow mode 10X.
8
www.tektronix.com
Multiformat, Multistandard Waveform Rasterizers — WVR7120 • WVR7020 • WVR6020
External Reference
Digital Audio (Option DDE/DPE and AD)
Sync Formats – NTSC and PAL and tri-level sync.
Inputs – 2 sets with 8 channels each, 32-192 kHz, 24 bit. Meets requirements of AES
3-ID and SMPTE 276M-1995.
Input Type – Passive loopthrough BNC, 75 Ω compensated.
Input Characteristics – BNC, 75 Ω terminated, unbalanced, 0.1 Vp-p to 2 Vp-p. Input Return Loss – 25 dB relative to 75 Ωp-p from 0.1 to 24 MHz (typical). Outputs – Up to 8 channels, AES3-ID output, 48 kHz 20 bit for embedded, 48 kHz
DC Input Impedance – 15 kΩ, nominal. Return Loss – >40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz, >35 dB to 30 MHz. Lock Range – ±50 ppm.
24 bit for analog to AES. For AES to AES loopthrough, output format equals input format. Meets requirements of SMPTE 276M-1995 (AES 3-ID). For decoded Dolby Digital, output is 24 bits at a rate of 32, 44.1, or 48 kHz for any one decoded pair. For decoded Dolby E, the output is 24 bits at 48 kHz or 47.952 kHz for up to 4 pairs. Output Characteristics – BNC, 75 Ω terminated, unbalanced, 0.9 Vp-p to 1.1 Vp-p into 75 Ω. Output Return Loss – >25 dB relative to 75 Ωp-p from 0.1 to 6 MHz (typical). Output Jitter – 3.5 ns, peak, typical, with 700 Hz high-pass filter per AES specification.
Monitor Output Signal Format (XGA D-sub Output) – 1024×768, 60 Hz vertical rate.
Waveform Horizontal Deflection Sweep Timing Accuracy – ±0.1%. Sweep Linearity – ±0.1%.
Vector Characteristics
Analog Audio (Option DDE/DPE and AD)
Vector Amplitude Accuracy – ±2%.
Analog Inputs – 2 sets of 6 channels each. Analog Input Characteristics – Balanced, unterminated through the rear-panel
Vector Phase Accuracy – ±2°.
connector.
Audio Characteristics (Optional Capability) Level Meter Resolution – 0.056 dB steps at 30 dB scale, from full scale to –20 dBFS. User-selectable Scales –
Analog: dBu, Din, Nordic, VU, IEEE PPM, BBC Scale, and user definable. Digital: dBFS, Din, Nordic, VU, IEEE PPM, BBC Scale, and user definable. Meter Ballistics – Selectable from true peak, PPM type 1, PPM Type 2, and Extended VU. Defined/Programmable Level Detection – Mute, clip user-programmable silence, over. Level Meter Accuracy over Frequency – +0.1 dB (digital) + 0.5 dB (analog) from 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 to –40 dBFS sine wave, Peak Ballistic mode (except for within 5 Hz of some submultiples of the sampling frequency).
Cross Talk – 40 dB 0 ±40° ≥30 dB at 5 MHz to 30 MHz ±3 dB amplitude change: MTC, LTC -> RS422 LTC Timecode Output: MTC -> LTC, RS422 -> LTC GPIO: 8 Inputs, 8 Outputs Video Sync Input: Bi-Level (SD) or Tri-Level (HD)
Based on our P2MMC but using USB Midi. the P2MMC-USB may be used in a number of different configurations allowing DAW’s with Midi In/Out to be resolved to Video Syncs and be controlled by or control RS422 devices.
External Control of DAW
RS422 as Input Virtual Machine 1:
DAW follows VM VM controlled by DAW VM controlled by RS422 DAW Track Arming from RS422
P2 -> MMC:
DAW motion and Track Arming controlled by RS422
LTC -> MTC1:
DAW follows LTC Input, DAW Track Arming from RS422
Control of Video Machine from DAW
RS422 as Output Virtual Machine 2:
DAW follows VM VM controlled by DAW, Device follows LTC O/P RS422 Track Arming from DAW
MMC -> P2
DAW control of RS422 Device
LTC -> MTC2
DAW follows LTC DAW control of RS422 Machine
The P2MMC-USB is ideal to connect MIDI systems (Protools LE, Nuendo, Sequoia, Ardour, Logic Pro, Cubase, Cakewalk) with timecode and video locked RS422 devices. The P2MMC-USB may also be used as a USB timecode interface providing GP Outputs against timecode or logging events against timecode. CB is developing an EDL Recorder using the P2MMC-USB to record live edit decisions to increase efficiency in post production.
`
Four LED Indicators USB • • •
Off Flash On
USB not recognised USB Connected, no MIDI communications received for 4 seconds USB Connected, MIDI communications received within the last 4 seconds
RS422 • Off • On
No communications received on RS422 Port for one second Communications received within the last second
Video • Off • Flash • On
No Video Syncs Video Syncs, Time Code Generator Not Locked to frame edge Video Syncs, Time Code Generator Locked to frame edge
LTC • • •
No Timecode Input Stationary or discontinuous Timecode Incrementing/Decrementing Timecode for more than one second
Off Flash On
RS422 Port
On Later versions (P2MMC-USB) this is User selectable to Output (Device Control) or Input (Device Emulation) the tx-Rx connections are User defined as Input, Output or Follow Mode. Note: On early versions (P2MMC-2) this is connected as an output (Device Control) and cannot be changed by software, use a tx-rx invert cable to connect as an input (Device Emulation) (see appendix-A).
USB Port
The USB Port uses MIDI Class drivers that are pre-installed in Windows, MAC and Linux operating systems. Providing more than one MIDI port enables the interface to communicate with both the application and the CB GUI.
GUI
Communication via the USB port the GUI provides three main functions • Machine control and track arming on any device connected to the RS422 port. • User defined settings: Mode, Timecode Standard, GPIO…. • Software Update: Updates may be downloaded from our web site and installed
LTC Timecode Output
When Video syncs are connected the timecode standard switches automatically with the frame rate of the Video. When NTSC syncs are detected the selection of Drop or Non-Drop Timecode is determined by a user setting. When no video syncs are connected the timecode standard is user definable using the provided GUI. The timecode output reflects the position of the current controlled device.
GPIO
Eight Open Collector Outputs may be controlled by Midi Note On / Note Off Commands or triggered by internally controlled timecode values. Eight protected CMOS inputs generate Midi Note On / Note Off events. CB Electronics will be releasing different application software to use these events.
CB Electronics
P2MMC-USB
15 October 2008
2
` GPIO Connections Pin Pin Function 1 GPI-Input 1 (Not Available on early models (P2MMC-2)) 14 GPO-Output 1 (Not Available on early models (P2MMC-2)) 2 GPI-Input 2 15 GPO-Output 2 3 GPI-Input 3 16 GPO-Output 3 4 GPI-Input 4 17 GPO-Output 4 5 GPI-Input 5 18 GPO-Output 5 6 GPI-Input 6 19 GPO-Output 6 7 GPI-Input 7 20 GPO-Output 7 8 GPI-Input 8 21 GPO-Output 8 9 22 10 0v 23 +5v 11 0v 24 +5v 12 0v 25 +5v 13 For Further information, software updates and configuration program access http://www.colinbroad.com/cbsoft/p2mmc2.html
CB Electronics
P2MMC-USB
15 October 2008
3
`
Appendix-A: Cable Diagrams
T5.03 RS422 (Sony 9 pin) CABLE Function SR-4 (Controller)
9 pin 'D' Male on cable (Both Ends)
Function (Controlled Device)
Cable Colour
1 Rx-
2
Red
Tx-
Tx+
3
Yellow
Rx+
Ground
4
Screen
Ground
5 6 Rx+
7
Blue
Tx+
Tx-
8
White
Rx-
9 T5.04 Tx-Rx Invert Sony 9 pin CABLE Function SR24 port E
CB Electronics
9 pin 'D' Male on Cable
9 pin 'D' Male on cable
1
1
Tx-
2
8
Red
Rx+
3
7
Yellow
Ground
4
4
Screen
5
5
6
6
Tx+
7
3
Blue
Rx-
8
2
White
9
9
P2MMC-USB
Cable Colour
15 October 2008
4
`
Appendix-B: DAW Configuration Protools LE “Peripherals – Synchronisation – MTC reader port- Any” “Peripherals – Machine Control – Midi Machine Control Master – Enable – p2mmc2 (2) (emulated) – id127
CB Electronics
Loddonside, Lands End House, Beggars Hill Road, Charvil, Berkshire, RG10 0UD, UK Tel +44 (0) 1189 320345 Fax +44 (0) 1189 320346 http://www.colinbroad.com E-mail [email protected]
CB Electronics
P2MMC-USB
15 October 2008
5